DocuCentre-III C4100/C3100 User Guide

DocuCentre-III C4100/C3100
User Guide
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Microsoft Network are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, and Adobe PostScript 3 are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
EtherTalk, Macintosh, and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
PCL, HP-GL, and HP-GL/2 are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation.
RSA and BSAFE are either registered trademarks or trademarks of RSA Security Inc. in the United
States and/or other countries.
RSA Security Inc. All right reserved.
All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.
Permission has been obtained from Microsoft Corporation for use of software screen shots.
For information on license, refer to About License.
The data saved in the hard disk of the machine may be lost if there is any problem in the hard disk.
Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data
loss.
Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus or
computer hacking.
Important
1. This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not
be copied or modified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.
2. Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
3. We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages.
4. Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual.
Unauthorized operation can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems
resulting from unauthorized operation of the equipment.
An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign
Exchange and Foreign Trade of Japan and/or the export control regulations of the United States.
XEROX, THE DOCUMENT COMPANY, Ethernet, CentreWare, and the stylized X are registered
trademarks of Xerox Corporation. DocuWorks is a trademark of Xerox Corporation or Fuji Xerox Co.,
Ltd. All Xerox and Fuji Xerox product names are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Xerox
Corporation or Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ........................................................................................................ 1
1
Before Using the Machine ........................................................................................ 9
Preface ...................................................................................................................... 10
Types of Manuals ...................................................................................................... 11
Using This Guide ....................................................................................................... 12
Organization of This Guide ................................................................................... 12
Conventions .......................................................................................................... 13
Safety Notes .............................................................................................................. 15
Electrical Safety .................................................................................................... 16
Machine Installation .............................................................................................. 17
Operational Safety ................................................................................................ 20
Consumable.......................................................................................................... 22
Regulation ................................................................................................................. 24
Radio Frequency Emissions (Class B) ................................................................. 24
Product Safety Certification (UL, CB) ................................................................... 24
Environment .............................................................................................................. 25
About License............................................................................................................ 26
RSA BSAFE.......................................................................................................... 26
Heimdal................................................................................................................. 26
LZMA .................................................................................................................... 26
JPEG Code ........................................................................................................... 27
Libcurl ................................................................................................................... 27
FreeBSD ............................................................................................................... 27
OpenLDAP............................................................................................................ 28
DES....................................................................................................................... 30
AES....................................................................................................................... 30
TIFF (libtiff)............................................................................................................ 30
ICC Profile (Little cms) .......................................................................................... 30
XPS (XML Paper Specification) ............................................................................ 30
EDICT and COMPDIC .......................................................................................... 30
Legal Notice............................................................................................................... 32
2
Product Overview .................................................................................................... 33
Machine Components................................................................................................ 34
Power On / Off........................................................................................................... 39
Powering On ......................................................................................................... 39
Powering Off ......................................................................................................... 40
Circuit Breaker........................................................................................................... 41
Energy Saver Mode................................................................................................... 42
Entering the Energy Saver Mode.......................................................................... 42
Exiting the Energy Saver Mode ............................................................................ 42
1
Control Panel..............................................................................................................44
Screens and Buttons Displayed.............................................................................46
Entering Text ..............................................................................................................47
Installing the Tray Attachment on the Finisher-B1 .....................................................48
3
Copy ..........................................................................................................................49
Copying Procedure.....................................................................................................50
Step 1 Loading Documents ...................................................................................50
Step 2 Selecting Features .....................................................................................52
Step 3 Entering a Quantity.....................................................................................53
Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.................................................................................53
Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status ......................................................54
Operations during Copying.........................................................................................55
Stopping the Copy Job ..........................................................................................55
Changing the Number of Copies ...........................................................................56
Interrupting the Copy Job ......................................................................................56
Copy ...........................................................................................................................58
Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies) ...........................................58
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ...................................................61
Output Color (Selecting the Color for Copying) .....................................................63
Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)............................................................66
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) ...................66
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)........................................................66
Image Quality .............................................................................................................67
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).......................................................67
Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density / Sharpness / Saturation of images).......68
Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents /
Adjusting Contrast) ................................................................................................69
Color Effects (Selecting an Image Quality)............................................................69
Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance) ..............................................................70
Color Shift (Adjusting the Color Tone) ...................................................................71
Layout Adjustment......................................................................................................72
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies) ............................................................72
Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .............................73
2 Sided Book Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)........................74
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)...................................75
Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ......76
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) ...................77
Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)............................................................78
Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images) ..........................................80
Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images) ..............................................81
Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents) ...............81
Output Format ............................................................................................................82
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies) ............................................................82
Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)..........................................................82
2
Table of Contents
Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) .................................................................. 84
Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies).................................................................... 87
Transparency Options (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies) ........... 88
Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet) ........................................ 89
Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)........................... 90
Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)........................................ 91
Annotations (Adding a Comment / a Date / Page Numbers to Copies) ................ 91
Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies) ................. 96
Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded Paper) ................................................................... 98
Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet) ...................... 98
ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card) .......................................... 99
Job Assembly .......................................................................................................... 100
Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as
One Job) ............................................................................................................. 100
Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)................................... 102
Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals) .......................................................... 103
Delete Outside/Delete Inside
(Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area)............................................... 104
Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job) .......................... 105
4
Fax .......................................................................................................................... 107
Fax Procedure ......................................................................................................... 108
Step 1 Loading Documents................................................................................. 108
Step 2 Selecting Features................................................................................... 110
Step 3 Specifying Destinations ........................................................................... 111
Step 4 Starting the Fax Job ................................................................................ 112
Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in Job Status...................................................... 113
Operations during Faxing ........................................................................................ 114
Stopping the Fax Job .......................................................................................... 114
Changing the Scan Settings ............................................................................... 115
About Internet Fax ................................................................................................... 116
Internet Fax Overview......................................................................................... 116
Sending Internet Fax........................................................................................... 118
Receiving Internet Fax ........................................................................................ 119
Useful Features................................................................................................... 120
About Server Fax..................................................................................................... 123
Sending Server Fax ............................................................................................ 123
Fax/Internet Fax ...................................................................................................... 125
Internet Fax/Fax (Selecting Internet Fax/Fax) .................................................... 125
+Add (Sending Faxes to Multiple Recipients) ..................................................... 125
Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book.............................................. 126
Speed Dialing (Specifying a Destination Using an Address Number) ................ 127
Specifying a Destination using a One Touch Button........................................... 128
Specifying a Destination using the Keyboard Screen ......................................... 128
Specifying a Destination using the Redial Feature ............................................. 129
3
Entering Specific Symbols ...................................................................................130
Removing/Confirming a Recipient .......................................................................130
General Settings.......................................................................................................132
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting Fax Density) ..............................................................132
2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals) .............................................132
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).....................................................133
Resolution (Specifying the Scanning Resolution)................................................134
Layout Adjustment....................................................................................................135
2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals) .............................................135
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Original).....................................135
Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents
Simultaneously) ...................................................................................................136
Book Faxing (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)............................136
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scan Ratio) .........................................................137
Stamp (Adding a Stamp when Scanning a Document) .......................................138
Fax/Internet Fax Options..........................................................................................139
Acknowledgement Report (Confirming Transmission Results) ...........................139
Starting Rate (Selecting a Communication Mode)...............................................140
Priority Send / Delay Start (Specifying Send Priority/Send Time) .......................141
Transmission Header Text
(Adding Sender Name and Phone Number to Faxes) ........................................143
Cover Page (Transmitting Documents With a Cover Page) ................................143
Internet Fax Subject (Specifying the Internet Fax Subject) .................................145
Message (Mail Contents) (Editing the Internet Fax Mail Contents) .....................146
Recipient Print Sets (Printing Multiple Sets at the Destination Machine) ............146
Multiple-Up (Combining Multiple Pages into One Sheet) ....................................147
Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox) ...........................................................147
F Code (Using F Code Transmission) .................................................................149
Internet Fax Profile (Specifying Internet Fax Profiles) .........................................151
Encryption (Sending Internet Fax Encrypted by S/MIME) ...................................152
Digital Signature (Sending Internet Fax with a Digital Signature by
S/MIME)...............................................................................................................152
More Options............................................................................................................154
Polling (Retrieving Documents from Remote Machines) .....................................154
Store for Polling (Allowing Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents from
Your Machine) .....................................................................................................155
On-hook (Confirming Remote Machine Response Prior to Transmission)..........157
Broadcast .................................................................................................................158
Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients).........................................158
Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station) ................158
Remote Relay Broadcast (Performing Relay Broadcast to Remote Locations) ..162
Receiving Faxes.......................................................................................................167
Switching between Auto Receive and Manual Receive.......................................167
Using Auto Receive .............................................................................................167
Using Manual Receive.........................................................................................168
4
Table of Contents
Using Mailbox Receive ....................................................................................... 168
Facsimile Information Services................................................................................ 169
Using the Receiver.............................................................................................. 169
When Not Using a Receiver................................................................................ 170
5
Scan ........................................................................................................................ 171
Scanning Procedure ................................................................................................ 172
Step 1 Loading Documents................................................................................. 172
Step 2 Selecting Features................................................................................... 174
Step 3 Starting the Scan Job .............................................................................. 175
Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job Status ................................................... 176
Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data........................................................................ 177
Operations during Scanning .................................................................................... 178
Stopping the Scan Job........................................................................................ 178
Changing Scan Settings ..................................................................................... 179
E-mail ...................................................................................................................... 180
Address Book (Specifying an E-mail Address) ................................................... 180
New Recipients (Entering an Address) ............................................................... 183
Add Me (Adding the Sender’s Address).............................................................. 183
Recipient(s) (Editing a Recipient) ....................................................................... 184
From (Setting the Sender’s Address).................................................................. 185
Subject (Setting the Subject) .............................................................................. 185
Message (Entering the E-mail Body) .................................................................. 186
Scan to Mailbox ....................................................................................................... 187
Network Scanning ................................................................................................... 188
Scan to PC .............................................................................................................. 189
Transfer Protocol ................................................................................................ 189
Address Book (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Address Book) .............. 189
Browse... (Specifying a Destination PC by Browsing Your Network).................. 190
Specifying a Destination (Specifying a Destination PC Using the
Screen Keyboard) ............................................................................................... 190
General Settings...................................................................................................... 192
Color Scanning (Selecting the Color To Scan) ................................................... 192
2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)................................... 193
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .................................................... 194
File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)........................................ 194
Advanced Settings................................................................................................... 202
Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph) ..................................................... 202
Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness) ........................ 202
Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/
Adjusting Contrast) ............................................................................................. 203
Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background) ....................... 203
Color Space (Specifying Color Space) ............................................................... 204
Layout Adjustment................................................................................................... 205
Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution) .................................................. 205
5
2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ...................................205
Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages on Separate Sheets) ..........................206
Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size) ................................................................207
Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ....207
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) .................208
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)...................................................209
E-mail Options/Filing Options...................................................................................211
Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning).....211
Read Receipts (Specifying Read Receipts).........................................................212
Split Send (Sending in Sections) .........................................................................212
File Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Sent) .......................................213
Reply To (Specifying a Reply Address) ...............................................................213
File Name Conflict (Setting the Action to be Taken for File Name Conflict) ........214
Document Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Saved) ..........................214
Encryption (Sending E-mail Encrypted by S/MIME) ............................................214
Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME) ..............215
Login Name .........................................................................................................215
Password .............................................................................................................215
Meta Data ............................................................................................................215
6
Send from Mailbox .................................................................................................217
Mailbox Operating Procedure...................................................................................218
Step 1 Opening the [Send from Mailbox] Screen ................................................218
Step 2 Selecting a Mailbox ..................................................................................218
Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ..................................................218
Step 4 Operating Mailbox Documents .................................................................219
Selecting a Mailbox ..................................................................................................220
Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox ..........................................................221
Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox.............................................................222
[Mailbox - Print Settings] Screen .........................................................................222
Configuring/Starting Job Flow ..................................................................................225
[Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] Screen.............................................................226
Job Flow Restrictions...........................................................................................229
7
Job Flow Sheets .....................................................................................................231
Job Flow Procedure .................................................................................................232
Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen....................................................232
Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet......................................................................232
Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet................................................233
Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet .....................................................................233
Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet .....................................................................234
8
Stored Programming..............................................................................................237
Stored Programming Overview ................................................................................238
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs ...................................................239
6
Table of Contents
Registering Stored Programs.............................................................................. 240
Deleting Stored Programs................................................................................... 241
Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name ...................................................... 241
Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs ................................................. 241
Calling a Stored Program ........................................................................................ 243
9
Job Status .............................................................................................................. 245
Job Status Overview................................................................................................ 246
Checking Current/Pending Jobs.............................................................................. 247
Checking Completed Jobs....................................................................................... 248
Printing and Deleting Stored Documents ................................................................ 249
Secure Print ........................................................................................................ 249
Sample Set ......................................................................................................... 251
Delayed Print ...................................................................................................... 252
Charge Print........................................................................................................ 253
Private Charge Print............................................................................................ 255
Public Mailbox..................................................................................................... 256
Undelivered Faxes .............................................................................................. 257
Printing Pending Jobs.............................................................................................. 259
Handling Error Terminations.................................................................................... 260
10 Computer Operations............................................................................................ 261
Features Overview .................................................................................................. 262
Print ......................................................................................................................... 263
Print Features ..................................................................................................... 263
Setup................................................................................................................... 264
Printing................................................................................................................ 265
E-mail Printing ......................................................................................................... 266
Setup................................................................................................................... 266
Sending E-Mail.................................................................................................... 266
Sending Fax ............................................................................................................ 268
Registering Destinations ..................................................................................... 268
Importing Scanned Data.......................................................................................... 270
Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application.................................................... 270
Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3 ...................................................................... 272
Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services .................................................. 274
Importing Using EasyOperator............................................................................ 275
CentreWare Internet Services ................................................................................. 277
11 Appendix ................................................................................................................ 281
Glossary .................................................................................................................. 282
Index.............................................................................................................................. 289
7
1 Before Using the Machine
This chapter describes how to use this guide, as well as safety notes and legal
notice you need to read before using the machine.
z
Preface .......................................................................................................10
z
Types of Manuals .......................................................................................11
z
Using This Guide ........................................................................................12
z
Safety Notes ............................................................................................... 15
z
Regulation...................................................................................................24
z
Environment................................................................................................ 25
z
About License .............................................................................................26
z
Legal Notice................................................................................................ 32
1 Before Using the Machine
Preface
Before Using the Machine
Thank you for selecting the DocuCentre-III C4100/C3100 (hereafter referred to as “the
machine”).
This guide explains how to operate the machine and the precautions that must be
followed during operation. To get the most out of the machine and to use it effectively,
be sure to read this guide before use.
This guide assumes that an operator has a basic knowledge of the operating
environment of the personal computer in use, networking environments, and how to
operate a personal computer. For information on the environment of the personal
computer in use, basic knowledge of networking environments, and how to operate a
personal computer, refer to the manuals provided with the personal computer,
operating system, and network system.
1
After reading this guide, be sure to keep it handy for quick reference. It will be useful in
case you forget how to perform operations or if a problem occurs with the machine.
For instructions on configuring your network environment, refer to the Administrator
Guide. For information about optional accessories for the printer functionality, also refer
to the guide provided with each optional accessory.
In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol .
Always read and follow the instructions before performing the required procedures.
10
Types of Manuals
Types of Manuals
Accompanying Manuals
The machine comes with the following documentation, which is referred to as
accompanying manuals.
The accompanying manuals include the descriptions of how to configure and use the
machine.
„User Guide (this guide)
Describes all the necessary steps for copy/print/fax/scan.
„Administrator Guide
Aimed toward machine administrators, as a guide to loading paper, configuring the
system settings, setting up the network environment, and solving problems that may
occur with the machine.
„Quick Reference Guide
Introduces the basic operations of the machine, as well as daily management and
maintenance.
„Manual (HTML)
A guide for installing print drivers, configuring the printer environment, etc. This manual
is included in the CD-ROM on the Driver CD Kit.
Guides for Optional Accessories
Optional accessories are available for this machine. Some of them come with user
guides. The user guides, provided as printed or online documentation, are referred to
as guides for optional accessories.
The guides for optional accessories describe all the necessary steps for using the
optional accessories and installing the software.
11
Before Using the Machine
We provide the following guides for optimum usage of the machine.
1
1 Before Using the Machine
Using This Guide
Before Using the Machine
This guide provides all the necessary copy/print/fax/scan operating procedures, and
precautions.
Organization of This Guide
This guide consists of the following chapters.
„1 Before Using the Machine
Describes how to use this guide as well as cautions on using the product safely and
legally.
1
„2 Product Overview
Describes machine’s basic information such as the names of components, how to
switch on and off, how to use the touch screen, and how to set the energy saver feature.
„3 Copy
Describes the copy features and operations.
„4 Fax
Describes the fax features and operations.
„5 Scan
Describes the scan features and operations
„6 Send from Mailbox
Describes the mailbox features and how to work with mailboxes.
„7 Job Flow sheets
Describes operations using a job flow created on a remote system.
„8 Stored Programming
Describes the stored programming feature.
„9 Job Status
Describes how to check job status and to cancel jobs.
„10 Computer Operations
Describes operations performed from a computer, such as printing documents,
importing scanned documents, Direct Fax, as well as using CentreWare Internet
Services.
„11 Appendix
A glossary of terms used in this guide.
12
Using This Guide
Conventions
The screen images and illustrations that are used in this guide are based on the
machine configuration with the various options. Some of the items in the screen
images may not be displayed or there may be features that cannot be used
depending on the machine configuration.
z
In this document, "Computer" refers to a personal computer or workstation.
z
z
Before Using the Machine
z
The following terms are used in this guide:
Important
: Indicates important information that you should read.
Note
: Indicates additional information on operations or features.
The following symbols are used in this guide:
"
[
"
]
:
• A cross-reference included in this guide.
:
• Refers to names of CD-ROM, features, and touch screen
messages and input text.
:
• Refers to folders, files, applications, button or menu names
displayed in the touch screen.
1
• The names of menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes
displayed on the computer screen and their buttons and
menu names.
<
> button :
Indicates a hardware button on the computer.
<
> key
:
Indicates a key on the keyboard of the computer.
:
• Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on the
control panel.
Example: When you see the procedure "select [Tools] >
[Setup] > [Mailbox]", this means that you need to select
[Tools], select [Setup], and then select [Mailbox].
>
• Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on a
computer.
Example: When you see the procedure "to search for files
and folders, click [Start] > [Search] > [For Files or Folders]",
this means that you need to click [Start], click [Search], and
then click [For Files or Folders] in order to search for files and
folders.
• The reference is indicated in the following manner:
"Refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio
Tone" in the Administrator Guide."
The sentence above means that you need to refer to the
section "Audio Tones", which can be found under "Common
Service Settings" in chapter 5 Tools of the Administrator
Guide.
13
1 Before Using the Machine
z
Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows:
, ,Long Edge Feed (LEF):Loading with one of the long edges of the document or
paper.
Before Using the Machine
, ,Short Edge Feed (SEF):Loading with one of the short edges of the document
or paper.
1
14
LEF Orientation
SEF Orientation
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Safety Notes
Safety Notes
This product and recommended supplies have been tested and found to comply with
strict safety requirements including safety agency approvals and compliance with
environmental standards. Follow the following instructions for safety use.
WARNING
Any unauthorized alteration including an addition of new functions or connection to
external devices may not be covered by the product warranty. Contact your local Fuji
Xerox representative for more information.
Follow all warning instructions marked on this product. The warning marks stand for the
followings:
Used for item that if not followed strictly, can lead death or severe or
fatal injuries and the possibility to do it is comparatively high.
Used for items that if not followed strictly, can lead to severe or fatal
injuries.
Used for items that if not followed strictly, can cause injuries to user or
damages to machine.
A symbol for items to pay attention to when handling machine.
Follow instructions carefully to use machine safely.
Caution
Flammable Explodable
Electric
shock
Heated
surface
Moving
object
Pinched
fingers
A symbol for prohibited items. Follow instructions carefully to avoid
any dangerous acts.
Prohibited
No fire
Do not
touch
Do not use
Do not
in bathroom tear down
Keep away
from wet
Never
touch
A symbol for items that must be performed. Follow instructions
carefully to carry out these essential tasks.
Instructions
Unplug
Ground/
Earth
15
Before Using the Machine
Before using this product, read "Safety Notes" carefully for safety use.
1
1 Before Using the Machine
Electrical Safety
Before Using the Machine
This product shall be operated by the power source as indicated on the product's data
plate. Consult your local power company to check if your power source meets the
requirements.
1
Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet. To prevent
overheat and a fire accident, do not use an extension cord, a multi-plug
adaptor or a multiple connector. Consult your local Fuji Xerox representative
to check if an outlet is grounded.
WARNING: Connect this product to a protective earth circuit.
This product is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin. The plug
fits only into an earthed electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. If the plug
doesn't fit to the outlet, contact an electrician to replace the outlet to avoid risk
of electric shock. Never use an earthed adapter plug to connect the product to
the electrical outlet that has no earth connection terminal.
Improper connection of a grounding conductor may cause electric shock.
Connect this product to a branch circuit or an outlet that has larger capacity
than the rated ampere and voltage of this product. See the data plate on the
rear panel of this product for its rated ampere and voltage.
Never touch the power cord with wet hand. It may cause electric shock.
Do not place an object on the power cord.
Always keep the plug connection free of dust. The dusty and damp
environment may bring about minute electric current in a connector. It may
generate heat and eventually cause a fire accident.
To avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident, only use the power cord
supplied with this product or the ones designated by Fuji Xerox.
The power cord is exclusive use for this product. Do not use it for any other
product.
Do not damage or alter the power cord. Damage and alteration may generate
heat and eventually cause electric shock or a fire accident.
If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed, contact your local
Fuji Xerox representative for its replacement. Do not use a damaged or
uninsulated cord to avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident.
When cleaning this product, always switch off and unplug it. Access to a live
machine interior may cause electric shock.
Do not unplug or re-plug this product with the switch on. Plugging and
unplugging a live connector may deform the plug and generate heat, and
eventually cause a fire accident.
Hold the plug not the cord when unplugging this product, or it may damage the
cord and cause electric shock or a fire accident.
Switch off and unplug the product when it is not used over weekends or long
holidays. It may cause deterioration of insulations and eventually electric
shock or a fire accident.
16
Safety Notes
Once you notice any unusual condition, switch off and unplug this product first
and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Machine Installation
Do not locate this product where people might step on or trip over the power
cord. Friction or excessive pressure may generate heat and eventually cause
electric shock or a fire accident.
Never locate this product in the following places:
z
Near radiators or any other heat sources
z
Near volatile flammable materials such as curtains
z
In the hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environment
z In the place receiving direct sunlight
z Near cookers or humidifiers
Locate this product on the level and sturdy surface that can withstand a weight
of 190 Kg (maximum weight when Two Tray Module, High Capacity Feeder
and Finisher with Booklet Maker are installed). Otherwise, if tilted, the product
may fall over and cause injuries.
Locate this product in a well-ventilated area. Do not obstruct ventilation
openings of the product. Poor ventilation may cause overheat and a fire
accident.
Keep the minimum clearance as follows for ventilation and an access to the
power plug. Unplug the product if an abnormal condition is noted.
75
670
1517
772
640
501
1341
200
(Unit: mm)
17
Before Using the Machine
Once a month, switch off this product and check if
z the power cord is plugged firmly into an electrical outlet;
z the plug is not excessively heated, rusted or bent;
z
the plug and electrical outlet are free of dust; and
z the power cord is not cracked or worn down.
1
1 Before Using the Machine
With Platen Cover (optional)
75
Before Using the Machine
670
1517
772
640
501
1
200
(Unit: mm)
1341
With High Capacity Feeder (optional)
75
670
1517
772
651
200
540
(Unit: mm)
1391
With Finisher-A1 (optional)
75
670
1517
772
501
723
117
(Unit: mm)
1341
18
Safety Notes
With Finisher-B1 (optional)
75
Before Using the Machine
670
1517
772
640
501
620
50
(Unit: mm)
1
1811
With Finisher-B1 and Booklet Maker Unit (optional)
75
670
1517
772
640
501
620
50
(Unit: mm)
1811
Do not incline the product at more than 10 degree angle. Otherwise, it may fall
over and cause injuries.
back
front
right
front
left
left
back
right
19
1 Before Using the Machine
Always lock the wheels of this product after installation. Otherwise, it may fall
over or slide and cause injuries.
Before Using the Machine
To keep this product in a good performance and condition, always use it in the
following environment:
zTemperature: 10 - 32°C
z
Humidity: 15 - 85%
1
When the product is left in a chilly room and the room is rapidly warmed up by
heater, dew condensation may form inside the product and cause a partial
deletion on printing.
Operational Safety
The operator's product maintenance procedures are described in the customer
documentation supplied with this product. Do not carry out any other
maintenance procedures not described in the documentation.
This product features safety design not to allow operators access to hazard
areas. The hazard areas are isolated from operators by covers or protectors
which require a tool to remove. To prevent electric shock and injuries, never
remove those covers and protectors.
To avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident, switch off and unplug the
product promptly in the following conditions, then contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
z The product emits smoke or its surface is unusually hot.
z
The product emits unusual noise or odor.
z The power cord is cracked or worn down.
z A circuit breaker, fuse or any other safety device is activated.
z
Any liquid is spilled into the product.
z The product is soaked in water.
z Any part of the product is damaged.
Do not insert any object into slots or openings of this product.
Do not place any of the followings on the product:
Liquid container such as flower vases or coffee cups
z
Metal parts such as staples or clips
z Heavy objects
z
If liquid is spilled over or metal parts are slipped into the product, it may cause
electric shock or a fire accident.
Do not use conductive paper such as carbonic paper or coated paper. When
paper jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and eventually a fire accident.
20
Safety Notes
When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive
to it. Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product.
Never use aerosol cleaners, or it may catch fire and cause explosion.
Never play the CD-ROM supplied with the product on an audio player. Always
use a CD-ROM player. Otherwise, large sound may damage audio players or
your ears.
Laser Safety
CAUTION: Any operations or adjustments not stated in the operation manual
may cause hazardous light exposure and eventually burn injuries or loss of
eyesight.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the Class 1 Laser
Equipment requirements defined by the international standard IEC60825 and
has no light exposure hazard. The product has no hazardous light emission as
it features light protection components and covers to shut in all light beam
during operation and maintenance.
Always follow all warning instructions marked on or supplied with this product.
To avoid the risk of burn injuries and electric shock, never touch the area with
the "High Temperature" or "High Voltage" marks on.
Keep electrical and mechanical safety interlocks effective. Keep the safety
interlocks away from magnetic materials. Magnetic materials may accidentally
activate the product and cause injuries or electric shock.
A ground fault interrupter is embedded in this product. If current leakage
occurs, the ground fault interrupter automatically cuts off power circuit to
prevent electric shock and a fire accident. The ground fault interrupter is
normally ON ("|"). Check once a month if the ground fault interrupter works
properly in accordance with the following procedure:
(1) Press TEST button to turn off the ground fault interrupter.
(2) Check the indication ("O"). It means that the ground fault interrupter circuit
works properly.
(3) Return the ground fault interrupter switch to ON ("|").
Power switch
RESET button
TEST button
If the circuit does not work properly, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
Do not attempt to remove a paper jammed deeply inside the product,
particularly a paper wrapped around a fuser or a heat roller. Otherwise, it may
cause injuries or burns. Switch off the product promptly and contact your local
Fuji Xerox representative.
21
Before Using the Machine
If you need to pull out a tray to remove paper jam, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative. Do not pull out a tray, otherwise it may cause injuries.
1
1 Before Using the Machine
Never touch the paper output area of the finisher during operation. It may
cause injuries.
Before Using the Machine
Be careful in removing jammed staples.
Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the document glass. It
may break the glass and cause injuries.
To move this product to another location, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
Ventilate well during extended operation or mass copying. It may affect the
office air environment due to odor such as ozone in a poorly ventilated room.
1
Provide proper ventilation to ensure the comfortable and safe environment.
Never open the rear cover of the machine. It may cause damages to machine.
Do not touch exposed connectors when you access the inside of the machine
to remove the jammed paper. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction due to
static discharge.
Consumable
Store all consumables in accordance with the instructions given on its package
or container.
Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Never use a vacuum
cleaner for the spills. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum
cleaner and cause explosion. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your
local Fuji Xerox representative.
Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the
cartridge may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji
Xerox representative for its disposal.
Never throw a waste toner bottle into an open flame. Toner may catch fire and
cause burn injuries or explosion. If you have a used waste toner bottle no
longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its disposal.
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN
INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE
INSTRUCTIONS.
Keep the drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a
child accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water
and consult a physician immediately.
When replacing the drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill
the toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and
mouth as well as inhalation.
22
Safety Notes
If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.
If you get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at
least 15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.
If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of
water and consult a physician immediately.
Before Using the Machine
If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth
with water.
1
23
1 Before Using the Machine
Regulation
Before Using the Machine
Radio Frequency Emissions (Class B)
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B
digital device, pursuant to the International Standard for Electromagnetic
Interference (CISPR Publ. 22) and Radiocommunication Act 1992 in Australia/
New Zealand. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This product
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning this product off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
z Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
z Increase the separation between this product and the receiver.
z
Connect this product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
z Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
1
Changes and modifications to this product not specifically approved by Fuji
Xerox may void the user’s authority to operate this product.
Product Safety Certification (UL, CB)
This product is certified by the following agency using the safety standards listed.
Agency
NEMKO
24
Standard
IEC60950-1:ed. 1
Environment
Environment
This product consumes 0.36 W or less power even with switch off. To avoid (or save)
the power consumption, unplug this product from an electrical outlet after use.
z
For environmental protection and efficient use of resources, Fuji Xerox reuses
returned toner cartridges and drum cartridges to make recycle parts, recycle
materials or energy recovery.
z
Proper disposal is required for toner cartridges and drum cartridges no longer
needed. Do not open toner cartridges and drum cartridges. Return them to your local
Fuji Xerox representative.
Before Using the Machine
z
1
25
1 Before Using the Machine
About License
Before Using the Machine
1
This section describes information about licenses. Be sure to read through it.
RSA BSAFE
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software from RSA Security Inc.
Heimdal
Copyright (c)2000 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal Institute of Technology,
Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
LZMA
LZMA SDK 4.21 Copyright (c) 1999-2005 Igor Pavlov (2005-06-08)
http://www.7-zip.org/
LZMA SDK 4.22 Copyright (c) 1999-2005 Igor Pavlov (2005-06-10)
http://www.7-zip.org/
26
About License
JPEG Code
Our printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2006, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES
OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
FreeBSD
This product contains the part of FreeBSD codes.
The FreeBSD Copyright
Copyright 1994-2006 The FreeBSD Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
27
Before Using the Machine
Libcurl
1
1 Before Using the Machine
Before Using the Machine
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE FREEBSD PROJECT ''AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FREEBSD PROJECT OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the
authors and should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or
implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
1
OpenLDAP
Copyright 1998-2006 The OpenLDAP Foundation All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License.
A copy of this license is available in the file LICENSE in the top-level directory of the
distribution or, alternatively, at <http://www.OpenLDAP.org/license.html>.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Individual files and/or contributed packages may be copyright by other parties and/or
subject to additional restrictions.
This work is derived from the University of Michigan LDAP v3.3 distribution. Information concerning this software is available at <http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html>.
This work also contains materials derived from public sources.
Additional information about OpenLDAP can be obtained at <http://www.openldap.org/>.
--Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Kurt D. Zeilenga.
Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Net Boolean Incorporated.
Portions Copyright 2001-2006 IBM Corporation.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License.
---
28
About License
Portions Copyright 1999-2005 Howard Y.H. Chu.
Portions Copyright 1999-2005 Symas Corporation.
Portions Copyright 1998-2003 Hallvard B. Furuseth.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that this notice is preserved.
The names of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without their specific prior written permission. This software
is provided ''as is'' without express or implied warranty.
--Portions Copyright (c) 1992-1996 Regents of the University of Michigan.
Before Using the Machine
All rights reserved.
1
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this
notice is preserved and that due credit is given to the University of Michigan at Ann
Arbor. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission. This software is
provided ''as is'' without express or implied warranty.
-----------------------------------------The OpenLDAP Public License
Version 2.8, 17 August 2003
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"),
with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and
notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution, and
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document..
The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time.
Each revision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under
terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the
license.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS
CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE
AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S) OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
29
1 Before Using the Machine
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Before Using the Machine
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific,
written prior permission. Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with
copyright holders.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California, USA. All
Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document
is granted.
1
DES
This product includes software developed by Eric Young(eay@mincom.oz.au)
AES
Copyright (c) 2003. Dr Brian Gladman. Worcester. UK. All rights reserved.
This product uses published AES software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD
licensing terms.
TIFF (libtiff)
Lib TIFF copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam leffler
Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics. Inc.
ICC Profile (Little cms)
Little cms copyright (c) 1988-2004 Marti Maria
XPS (XML Paper Specification)
This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation.
The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property
may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369.
EDICT and COMPDIC
The Japanese-English dictionaries (EDICT and COMPDIC) edited by The Electronic
Dictionary Research and Development Group under the coordination of Professor
James William Breen at Monash University are used in the searchable PDF kit option
of Fuji Xerox.
These Japanese-English dictionary files are licensed to customers under the terms and
conditions of a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike License. Prior to use, be sure
30
About License
to check the terms and conditions of this license at the URL below. Use of these
Japanese-English dictionaries is not permitted unless you agree to the terms and
conditions of this license.
The Japanese-English dictionaries are provided to customers on an as-is basis, and
Fuji Xerox and the original supplier make no representations of warranties of any kind.
z
Original Author Information (extracted from http://www.csse.monash.edu.au/~jwb/
edrdg/licence.html)
Copyright over the documents covered by this statement is held by James William
BREEN and The Electronic Dictionary Research and Development Group at Monash
University.
z
Monash University License Information
http://www.csse.monash.edu.au/~jwb/edrdg/licence.html
z
Information Regarding EDICT and COMPDIC
http://www.csse.monash.edu.au/~jwb/edict.html
http://www.csse.monash.edu.au/~jwb/compdic_doc.html
z
Information Regarding the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike License
http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.5/legalcode
31
Before Using the Machine
Furthermore, care should be taken because at the point in time that you begin to use
these Japanese-English dictionaries as specified in the said license, you accept and
agree to be bound by the terms and conditions of this license.
1
1 Before Using the Machine
Legal Notice
Before Using the Machine
Copying or printing certain documents may be illegal in your country. Penalties of fines
or imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty. The following are examples of
items that may be illegal to copy or print in your country.
1
z
Currency
z
Banknotes and checks
z
Bank and government bonds and securities
z
Passports and identification cards
z
Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner
z
Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments
This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or
accuracy. In case of doubt, contact your legal counsel.
32
2 Product Overview
This chapter describes machine’s basic information such as the names of
components, how to switch on and off, how to use the touch screen.
z
Machine Components.................................................................................34
z
Power On / Off ............................................................................................39
z
Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................41
z
Energy Saver Mode .................................................................................... 42
z
Control Panel ..............................................................................................44
z
Entering Text ..............................................................................................47
z
Installing the Tray Attachment on the Finisher-B1......................................48
2 Product Overview
Machine Components
This section describes the main components and functions of the machine.
„ 3-Tray Model with High Capacity Feeder (HCF B1) (optional)
1
Product Overview
2
3
12
4
5
11
2
10
6
7
9
8
No.
Component
Function
1
Duplex automatic
document feeder
Load the originals.
2
Document glass
Originals are loaded here.
3
Control panel
Consists of operation buttons, LED indicators and a touch screen.
Refer to "Control Panel" (P.44).
4
Exit 2 tray
Printed or copied documents are delivered with the printed side facing
down.
5
Power switch
Switches the power of the machine on/off.
6
Center output tray
Printed or copied documents are delivered with the printed side facing
down.
7
Front cover
Open this cover to replace consumables.
8
Tray 1, 2, 3
Accommodates paper.
9
Tray 6 (HCF B1)
Allows you to load up to 2,000 sheets of paper.
10
Tray 5 (Bypass)
Used for loading non-standard paper (thick-stock paper, and other
special media) that cannot be loaded in the Trays 1 to 3.
11
Auto duplex module
Allows you to make double-sided copies or prints automatically.
12
Side output tray
Copies and prints are delivered here facing up.
34
Machine Components
„Finisher-B1 (optional)
1
2
Product Overview
3
4
5
6
7
8
14
13
2
9
12
10
11
No.
1
Component
Tray attachment
Function
Install this attachment when delivering A4
finisher tray without stapling.
or A5
paper to the
For details, refer to "Installing the Tray Attachment on the Finisher-B1" (P.48).
2
Booklet unit (optional)
Staples creased outputs
3
Booklet unit side cover
Open this cover when replacing the booklet staple cartridge.
4
Booklet staple cartridge
Contains staples. Draw out this cartridge when replacing or adding
staples, or clearing staple jams.
5
Top cover
Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper
jams.
6
Finisher tray
Receives stapled or creased outputs.
7
Creaser unit
Creases outputs in half.
8
Staple cartridge
Contains staples.
9
Front cover
Open this cover when clearing paper jams or replacing staples.
10
Finisher-B1 (optional)
Staples copies or prints.
11
Front transport cover
Open this cover when throwing punch scraps.
12
Hole-punch waste
container
Receives punch scraps from the puncher.
35
2 Product Overview
No.
13
14
Component
Hole-punch unit 2 and 4
holes
Hole-punch unit 2 and 3
holes
(US standard)
(optional)
Product Overview
Center tray front transport
cover)
Function
Hole-punches outputs.
Note
Delivers copies and prints when they are unable to be delivered to the
output or finisher tray.
Pull the cover upward when clearing paper jams.
Note
Note
• The distance between the two holes made with the Hole-punch unit
2 and 3 holes (US standard) is 70 mm, which is different from the
80 mm distance made with the Hole-punch unit 2 and 4 holes.
• Remove outputs delivered to the center tray constantly.
• Finisher-B1 is optional. In this guide, the Finisher-A1 and Finisher-B1 are referred to as the
"Finisher".
• The power cord connected to Finisher-B1 is a connecting cord dedicated to the machine. Do
not connect this cord to any other devices than the machine.
2
36
Machine Components
„Finisher-A1 (optional)
1
Product Overview
4
2
2
3
No.
Component
Function
1
Finisher top cover
Open this cover when clearing paper jams.
2
Front cover
Open this cover when replacing the staple cartridge or clearing staple
jams.
3
Staple cartridge
Contains staples.
4
Center tray
Holds printed or copied documents.
Note
• The Finisher-A1 is optional. In this guide, the Finisher-A1 is referred to as the "Finisher".
37
2 Product Overview
„Right side and rear view of the machine
LINE4
7
LINE2
Product Overview
6
1
2
TEL
LINE1
5
4
3
2
No.
Component
Function
1
USB 2.0 interface
connector
Connected to a USB cable.
2
10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX
connector
Connected to a network cable.
3
<RESET> button
Automatically turns the power off when detecting current leakage.
„Telephone Line Connectors
No.
4
Name on the
machine cover
TEL
Name on the
touch screen
-
Function
Used to connect an external telephone.
Note • Do not connect another fax machine.
5
LINE 1
Line 1
Connected to a public telephone network.
6
LINE 2
(optional)
Line 2
Connected to a public telephone network.
7
LINE 4
(optional)
Line 4
Connected to a public telephone network.
Note
38
• Fax features are not available for some models. An optional package is required. For
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Power On / Off
Power On / Off
Turn on the power before operating the machine.
The machine is ready for operation within 30 seconds after the power is turned on. The
time may vary depending on the machine configuration.
Important • Switching off the power of the machine may cause loss of data being processed.
For information on the power saving feature, refer to "Energy Saver Mode" (P.42).
Note
• When the power is turned off, all functions of the machine will stop. Do not turn the
machine off if it is used all day for receiving faxes.
Powering On
2
The procedure for turning on the power is as follows.
1
Press the power switch to the [ | ] position to
turn the power on.
Note
Product Overview
Turn the machine off at the end of the day or when it is not in use for a long period of
time. Also, you can use the power saving feature when not in use for a while to reduce
the power consumption.
• The “Please wait...” message
indicates that the machine is warming
up. The machine cannot be used
during warming up. The machine will
be ready for operation within 30
seconds. The time may vary
depending on the machine
configuration.
• When the power does not come on,
check if the power cord is plugged into the
power outlet and the <RESET> button is
in a reset state (button is pressed in).
39
2 Product Overview
Powering Off
The procedure for turning the power off is as follows.
Important • Turning off the power of the machine may cause loss of data being processed.
1
Before turning the power off, make sure that all copy or print jobs have completely
finished. Also, make sure that the <Online> indicator and the <Job in Memory>
indicator are not lit.
Product Overview
Important • Never turn the power off in the following instances:
-While data is being received
-While jobs are being printed
-While jobs are being copied
-While jobs are being scanned
-While jobs are being faxed
• Turn off the power in 5 seconds after paper is delivered.
2
2
Press the power switch to the [
] position.
Important • Power off processing is performed internally on the machine for a while after the power
switch is turned off. Therefore, do not unplug the power cord from the power outlet
immediately after turning the power switch off.
• Before you turn the power back on after turning it off, wait 20 seconds.
40
Circuit Breaker
Circuit Breaker
The machine is provided with a circuit
breaker.
In the event of a current leakage, the breaker
will automatically cut off the power circuit to
prevent any leakage or fire from occurring.
RESET button
Product Overview
The <RESET> button is normally in a
pressed-in state as shown in the figure on the
right. When the machine is to be left unused
for a long period of time or is to be moved,
lightly press the <TEST> button with the tip of
a ball-pen or other fine-tipped object to
cancel the pressed-in state of the <RESET>
button.
Power switch
TEST button
Once a month, check the breaker for correct operation. Also, make sure that it is
earthed. If not, the breaker cannot detect current leakage which can cause electric
shock.
2
If you notice any unusual conditions, contact our Customer Support Center.
Note
• The <RESET> button automatically turns the power off when current leakage is detected.
Normally, do not operate this button.
• Before you cancel the pressed-in state of the <RESET> button, first make sure that the
power switch is off.
41
2 Product Overview
Energy Saver Mode
The machine is installed with a Energy Saver feature that will automatically cut off the
electricity to the machine if no copy or print data is received for a certain duration.
The Energy Saver feature has two modes, Low Power mode and Sleep mode.
The machine enters the Low Power mode after the preset time has elapsed if the
machine is left unused for a fixed period of time.
The machine then enters the Sleep mode if a further preset time elapses.
Product Overview
The machine enters the Sleep mode if the machine is left unused for 15 minute by
default.
To enter the Energy Saver mode, press the <Energy Saver> button on the control
panel, and then the machine enters the Energy Saver mode straight away.
„Low Power mode
In this mode, the power to the control panel and fuser unit is lowered to save power.
2
The touch screen goes out, and the <Energy Saver> button on the control panel lights.
To use the machine, press the <Energy Saver> button. The <Energy Saver> button
goes out to indicate that the Energy Saver feature is canceled.
„Sleep Mode
In this mode, the power is lowered more than in the Low Power mode.
The touch screen goes out, and the <Energy Saver> button on the control panel lights.
To use the machine, press the <Energy Saver> button. The <Energy Saver> button
goes out to indicate that the Energy Saver feature is canceled.
Entering the Energy Saver Mode
The following describes how to enter the Energy Saver mode.
1
Press the <Energy Saver> button.
Note
• The machine will not enter the
Energy Saver mode while
copy or print jobs are in
progress. Press <Energy
Saver> button after finishing
the jobs.
<Energy Saver>
button
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
Exiting the Energy Saver Mode
The following describes how to exit the Energy Saver mode.
The Energy Saver mode is exited in the following instances:
42
z
Pressing the <Energy Saver> button
z
Receiving data
z
Selecting [Apply] in CentreWare Internet Services
Energy Saver Mode
1
Press the <Energy Saver> button.
<Energy Saver>
button
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
Product Overview
2
43
2 Product Overview
Control Panel
The following describes the names and functions of components on the control panel.
2
1
34
5
6
7
8
9
Product Overview
001
002
003
016
017
018
004
005
006
019
020
021
1
2
3
10
007
008
009
022
023
024
4
5
6
11
010
011
012
025
026
027
7
8
9
12
0
#
013
014
015
028
029
030
13
C
2
21
No.
20
Component
19 18
17 16 15 14
Function
1
Contrast dial
Adjusts the contrast of the touch screen. Use this dial to enhance or
decrease the contrast.
2
Touch screen
Displays messages required for operation and buttons for various
features. You can directly touch the touch screen to instruct operations
in screens and set features.
3
<Online> indicator
Lights when the machine is sending or receiving data to or from a client.
4
<Job in Memory> indicator
Lights when data is stored in the machine's memory.
You can check stored documents in [Stored Documents List]. For information
on [Stored Documents List], refer to “4 Machine Status” > “Machine
Information” > “Print Reports” > “Job Status/Activity Report” > “Stored
Document List” in the Administrator Guide.
44
5
<Job Status> button
Press this button to confirm or cancel currently executing or completed
jobs, or to confirm or print saved documents.
In this manual, this button is indicated as the <Job Status> button.
6
<Review> button
Press this button to display the [Review] screen. In this screen, you can
check a list of the status of copy, fax and scan features whose settings
have changed from the defaults. You can also check the destination
information for sending faxes and e-mail.
In this manual, this button is indicated as the <Review> button.
7
<Machine Status> button
Press this button to confirm the machine status and meters, check the
state of consumables, and print reports.
In this manual, this button is indicated as the <Machine Status> button.
8
<Log In/Out> button
Press this button to display the User ID entry screen for logging into the
System Administration mode, Authentication mode, or Account
Administration mode. Press this button to log out as well.
In this manual, this button is indicated as the <Log In/Out> button.
9
<Energy Saver> button
If the machine is not operated for a while, the machine's power
consumption is lowered to enter the energy saver mode. In the energy
saver mode, this button lights up. To enter the energy saver mode,
press this button. To cancel the energy saver mode, press this button
again.
In this manual, this button is indicated as the <Energy Saver> button.
Control Panel
No.
Component
Function
<Clear All> button
Returns the statuses of all displayed services to their default values.
The machine returns to the same state as when it is powered on.
In this manual, this button is indicated as the <Clear All> button.
11
<Interrupt> button/indicator
Press this button to temporarily stop a continuous copy job or printing to
give another job higher priority. During an interrupt, the interrupt
indicator lights up. Pressing the <Interrupt> button again cancels the
interrupt and the previous operation is resumed.
In this manual, this button is indicated as the <Interrupt> button.
Some types of jobs cannot be executed in the Interrupt mode. Refer to “15
Appendix” > “Notes and Restrictions” > “Notes and Restrictions in the
Interrupt Mode” in the Administrator Guide.
12
<Stop> button
Press this button to stop the current copy job or communications.
In this manual, this button is indicated as the <Stop> button.
13
<Start> button
Press this button to start copying or scanning.
In this manual, this button is indicated as the <Start> button.
14
Numeric keypad
Press these buttons to enter the number of copies, passwords and other
numerical values.
In this manual, these buttons are indicated as the “numeric keypad”.
15
<Speed Dial> button
Used to specify a destination phone number for fax or e-mail.
In this manual, this button is indicated as the <Speed Dial> button.
16
<C (Clear)> button
Press this button to clear the numerical values entered with the numeric
keypad.
In this manual, this button is indicated as the <C> button.
17
<Dial Pause> button
Used to insert a pause into a destination number.
In this manual, this button is indicated as the <Dial Pause> button.
18
<Custom> buttons
(<Copy>, <Custom 2>,
<Custom 3> buttons)
Used to call a custom feature.
You can assign a feature to the buttons selected from the features
displayed on the [All Services] screen and [Language].
For how to assign features to the buttons, refer to “1 Before Using the
Machine” > “Customizing the Control Panel” > “Assigning Features to
<Custom> Buttons” in the Administrator Guide.
19
<All Services> button
Used to display the [All Services] screen.
In this manual, this button is indicated as the <All Services> button.
You can change the features that appear in the [All Services] screen. For
information, refer to “1 Before Using the Machine” > “Customizing the Control
Panel” > “Customizing the [All Services] Screen” in the Administrator Guide.
20
One touch button panels
Panels for one touch buttons.
You can leaf through panels to display 001 to 030, 031 to 060, and 061
to 070. M01 to M20 are reserved for the stored programming feature.
These buttons correspond to jobs registered in 01 to 20.
Note
21
One touch buttons
• This feature is not available for some models. An optional package
is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
Specify a recipient with one button. These buttons are available for fax
and Internet Fax.
Registered preset recipient numbers 001 to 070 are supported.
45
Product Overview
10
2
2 Product Overview
Screens and Buttons Displayed
The machine allows you to change the features and buttons displayed on the touch
screen. The screens you can customize are as follows:
Product Overview
z
Screen displayed when the power is turned on
z
Screen displayed when the machine exited the Energy Saver mode
z
Screen displayed after Auto Clear
z
Assigning features to the <Custom> buttons
z
The [All Services] screen
Note
• The following screens and buttons may have been changed by the system administrator.
Use the machine according to the changes being made.
Setting the Initial Screen
You can set the screen displayed after turning the machine on or exiting the Energy
Saver mode.
2
Setting the Screen Displayed after Auto Clear
You can select from [Last Selection Screen] to [All Services] to be displayed after Auto
Clear.
Assigning Features to the <Custom> Buttons
Assign features to the <Custom> buttons on the control panel: Custom 1 to Custom 3.
By assigning frequently-used features to the <Custom> buttons, you can switch to the
features without returning to the [All Services] screen.
Note
• By factory default, [Copy] is assigned to the <Copy> button, and no feature is assigned to
the <Custom 2> and <Custom 3> button.
Customizing the [All Services] Screen
You can customize the layout of features and buttons on the [All Services] screen that
is displayed when you press the <All Services> button on the control panel.
Changing the [Feature] Screen
You can customize the screen layouts for the following features listed on the [All
Services] screen.
z
Copy
z
Fax / Internet Fax
z
E-mail
z
Scan to Mailbox
z
Scan to PC
For how to change the screens for copy feature, refer to “5 Tools” > “Copy Service Settings” > “Copy
Tab - Features Allocation” in the Administrator Guide.
For how to change the screens for fax feature, refer to “5 Tools” > “Fax Service Settings” > “Screen
Defaults” in the Administrator Guide.
For how to change the screens for scan feature, refer to “5 Tools” > “Scan Service Settings” > “First
Tab” in the Administrator Guide.
46
Entering Text
Entering Text
During operations, a screen for entering text sometimes appears. This section
describes how to enter text.
Product Overview
You can enter the following characters: numerals, letters, and symbols.
Item
Description
Entering letters and numerals
If you select [Shift], uppercase letters appear. To return to
the lowercase letters, select [Shift] again.
Entering symbols
Select [Symbol].
Note
• Depending on the keyboard, the [Symbol] button
may be displayed as [More Characters].
Entering a space
Select [Space].
Deleting characters
Select [Backspace]. You can delete one character at a
time.
47
2
2 Product Overview
Installing the Tray Attachment on the Finisher-B1
When delivering A4 or B5 paper to the finisher tray without stapling, you can stack
the outputs more neatly by installing the tray attachment supplied with the finisher tray.
Remove the tray attachment from
the rear of the finisher tray.
2
Install the tray attachment onto the
middle of the finisher tray as shown
in the diagram.
Product Overview
1
2
48
3 Copy
This chapter describes the basic copy procedures and the copy features
provided by the machine.
z
Copying Procedure ..................................................................................... 50
z
Operations during Copying ......................................................................... 55
z
Copy ........................................................................................................... 58
z
Image Quality..............................................................................................67
z
Layout Adjustment ......................................................................................72
z
Output Format.............................................................................................82
z
Job Assembly ...........................................................................................100
3 Copy
Copying Procedure
This section describes the basic copy procedures. The following shows the reference
section for each procedure.
Step 1 Loading Documents .........................................................................................................50
Step 2 Selecting Features ............................................................................................................52
Step 3 Entering a Quantity ..........................................................................................................53
Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.......................................................................................................53
Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status ...........................................................................54
Step 1 Loading Documents
There are two methods for loading documents:
Copy
„Document Feeder
3
z
Single sheet
z
Multiple sheets
„Document Glass
z
Single sheet
z
Bound documents, such as books
Document Feeder
The document feeder supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from
125 x 115 mm to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).
The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For nonstandard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.
For information on entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the
Document)" (P.75).
The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in
the System Administration mode. For information about paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" >
"Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.
Document Type (Weight)
Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2)
Plain paper (50 - 80
g/m2)
Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 g/m2)
Number of
Sheets
75 sheets
75 sheets
50 sheets
Important • To avoid paper jams, use the document glass for folded or creased documents.
• Two sided scanning of lightweight paper 38 - 49 g/m2 is not supported.
For information about copying mixed sized documents, refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning
Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.76).
50
Copying Procedure
1
Remove any paper clips and
staples before loading the
document.
2
Place the documents face up
(when the documents are 2-sided,
place the front side up) in the
center of the document feeder.
Note
3
• The indicator lights up when
the document is loaded
correctly. When the indicator
is not lit, the document glass is
detecting the documents.
Press the <Clear (C)> button
and load the documents again.
Copy
Adjust the movable document
guides to match the size of the
document loaded.
3
Document Glass
The document glass supports a single sheet, a book, or other similar documents up to
297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).
Important • After using the document glass, close the document cover.
The document glass automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard
size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.
For information on entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the
Document)" (P.75).
The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in
the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" >
"Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
CAUTION
Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the document glass. It may
break the glass and cause injuries.
1
Open the document cover.
Important • Ensure that a screen is
displayed on the control
panel, and then load a
document. If a document is
loaded before a screen is
displayed, the machine may
not properly detect the
document size.
51
3 Copy
2
Place the document face down,
and align it against the top left
corner of the document glass.
3
Close the document cover.
Note
• When a standard size
document is placed on the
document glass, the size of
the document is displayed in
the message area.
Step 2 Selecting Features
You can select copy features under [Copy] on the [All Services] screen.
Note
• Features displayed may vary depending on the configuration of your machine.
Copy
• When the Authentication or Account Administration feature is used, a user ID and passcode
may be required. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.
1
3
Press the <All Services> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<All Services>
button
C
2
Select [Copy].
3
If the previous settings still remain,
press the <Clear All> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
4
52
Select each tab, and configure
features as necessary.
<Clear All>
button
Copying Procedure
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
"Copy" (P.58)
"Image Quality" (P.67)
"Layout Adjustment" (P.72)
"Output Format" (P.82)
"Job Assembly" (P.100)
Step 3 Entering a Quantity
You can enter up to 999 for the number of copies.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
Numeric keypad
3
C
2
If you enter an incorrect value,
press the <C> button and then
enter the correct value.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<C> button
C
Step 4 Starting the Copy Job
The following explains how to start a copy job.
1
Press the <Start> button.
Important • If the document has been set
in the document feeder, do not
hold down the document while
it is being conveyed.
Note
• If a problem occurs, an error
message appears in the touch
screen. Solve the problem in
accordance with the message.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
Copy
Enter the number of copies using
the numeric keypad. The number
of copies entered appears on the
upper right of the touch screen.
<Start>
button
• You can set the next job
during copying.
„If you have more documents
If you have more documents to copy, select [Next Original] on the touch screen while
the current document is being scanned. This allows you to scan the documents as a
single set of data.
53
3 Copy
1
Select [Next Original] while
scanning is in progress.
Note
• When using the document
feeder, load the next
document after the machine
has finished scanning the first
document.
• When the screen on the right is displayed and no operation is performed during a certain
period of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents.
2
Load the next document.
3
Press the <Start> button.
If you have more documents,
repeat Steps 2 and 3.
4
When all documents have been
scanned, select [Last Original].
Copy
3
• You can change the number of copies by selecting [Change Quantity...], which is displayed
when you select [Next Original]
Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status
The following explains how to confirm the job status of a copy job.
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Job Status>
button
C
2
Confirm the job status.
From the pull-down menu, you can
select and display the types of jobs
([All Jobs], [Printer & Print from
M’box], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax],
[Job flow, auto file transfer]).
Note
54
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
Operations during Copying
Operations during Copying
This section describes available operations during copying. The following shows the
reference section for each feature.
Stopping the Copy Job ............................................................................................................... 55
Changing the Number of Copies................................................................................................ 56
Interrupting the Copy Job........................................................................................................... 56
Stopping the Copy Job
To cancel the copy job in progress, follow the procedure below.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
Copy
Press either [Delete] on the touch
screen or the <Stop> button on the
control panel.
<Stop> button
C
2
Select [Delete].
„If the screen shown in step 1 does not appear even after you press the <Stop>
button on the control panel:
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Job Status>
button
C
2
Select the job to cancel, and then
select [Delete].
55
3
3 Copy
Changing the Number of Copies
During scanning or copying the document, you can change the number of copy sets.
1
Press either [Delete] on the touch
screen or the <Stop> button on the
control panel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Stop> button
C
Copy
3
2
Select [Change Quantity...].
3
Set the number of copy sets with the numeric keypad. The new quantity must include
the number of copies that have already been printed. You cannot enter a number less
than the number of copies that have already been printed.
4
Press the <Start> button.
Note
• If you enter the same value as the number of copies that have already been printed, the
machine will not execute a copy job even when you press the <Start> button.
Interrupting the Copy Job
You can temporarily stop the copy job to have the machine process another job.
Important • Press the <Interrupt> button only after all the documents have been scanned. The machine
does not accept another job while it is scanning the documents, or [Next Original] is being
selected.
1
Press the <Interrupt> button.
Note
2
Load a document and set features
if necessary.
3
Set the number of copy sets with
the numeric keypad.
4
5
Press the <Start> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Interrupt>
button
C
After you have finished making the interrupt copy, press the <Interrupt> button.
Note
56
• The interrupt indicator lights
up to indicate that the
machine is in the interrupt
mode.
• The interrupt indicator goes out to indicate that the interrupt mode is exited.
Operations during Copying
6
• If you used the document glass to copy the document, remove the document from the
document glass.
Press the <Start> button. The suspended copy job is resumed.
Copy
3
57
3 Copy
Copy
You can set the basic features on the [Copy] screen. The following shows the reference
section for each feature.
Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies) ................................................................58
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ........................................................................61
Output Color (Selecting the Color for Copying) ........................................................................63
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)...........................................................................67
Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options) .............................................................................82
Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet) ............................................................89
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)...........................................................................66
Copy
1
On the [All Services] screen, select
[Copy].
2
Select a feature on the [Copy]
screen.
3
Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)
This feature allows you to select a copy ratio to make enlarged or reduced copies.
1
Specify a copy ratio.
„Copy ratio entry box
Allows you to enter a value between 25 and 400% in 1% increments, by touching the
entry box and then using numeric keys, or by using the [ ] and [ ] buttons.
When you make enlarged/reduced copies from standard sized documents on standard
sized paper, the following copy ratios will be applied.
Copy
A6
B6
A5
B5
A4
B4
A3
A6
100%
122%
141%
173%
200%
245%
283%
B6
82%
100%
116%
142%
164%
200%
232%
A5
71%
86%
100%
122%
141%
174%
200%
B5
58%
70%
81%
100%
115%
141%
163%
A4
50%
61%
70%
86%
100%
122%
141%
B4
41%
50%
58%
70%
81%
100%
115%
A3
35%
43%
50%
61%
70%
86%
100%
Original
How to load document depends on the size and orientation of a document. For details,
refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.50).
58
Copy
For paper that can be loaded, refer to "2 Paper and Other Media" > "Paper Types" > "Supported Paper
Types" in the Administrator Guide.
„100%
Copies at the same image size as the original document.
„Auto %
Automatically determines the copy ratio based on the document size and the paper size
specified in [Paper Supply], and copies the document to fit into the paper.
Note
• If you select [Auto %], select an option other than [Auto Paper Select] in [Paper Supply].
„Ratios (3rd button)
Select from the preset ratio.
You can change the copy ratio associated with each button. For information on the settings, refer to "5
Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Number of Display Buttons" in the Administrator Guide.
Displays a pop-up window. Select a ratio from the options. Selecting [More] in the popup window displays the [Reduce/Enlarge] screen.
Refer to "When [Proportional %] is Selected" (P.59), "When [Independent X-Y%] is Selected" (P.60),
or "When [Calculator%] is Selected" (P.60).
When [Proportional %] is Selected
You can select a ratio from standard copy ratios, or can enter a ratio directly.
1
Select a copy ratio, or specify a
value.
„Copy ratio entry box
Touch the entry box, and then use the numeric keypad or the [ ] and [ ] buttons to
specify a ratio within the range of 25 to 400% in 1% increments.
„100%
Copies at the same image size as the original document.
„Auto %
Automatically determines the copy ratio based on the document size and the paper size
specified in [Paper Supply], and copies the document to fit into the paper.
Note
• If you select [Auto %], options other than [Auto Paper] is specified in [Paper Supply].
„Presets%
Selects from the preset ratios.
You can change the copy ratio associated with each button. For information on the settings, refer to "5
Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" in the Administrator Guide.
„Copy All
Slightly reduces the specified copy ratio to copy the complete image onto the paper.
When this option is selected, a check mark is displayed in the box.
Important • If you select [Copy All] and you do not want to erase the edges of the document, set the
amount of edge erase to 0 mm. Note that if the amount is set to 0 mm, the edges of the
copied document may get dirty or the image loss may occur.
59
Copy
„More...
3
3 Copy
When [Independent X-Y%] is Selected
Allows you to specify reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length separately.
1
Select any item.
„Width - X%, Length -Y%
Specifies reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length within the range of 25
to 400% in 1% increments. Use the [ ] and [ ] buttons or the numeric keypad to
specify a ratio.
„Lock X- Y%
Copy
Allows you to make the same ratio adjustment for the width and length at the same
time.
„Width: 100% / Length: 100%
3
Copies at the same image size as the original document.
„Auto
Automatically determines the reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length so
that the document image fits in the paper. When this option is selected, a check mark
is displayed in the box.
„Copy All X-Y%
Automatically determines the reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length so
that the document image fits in the paper, and then slightly reduces the ratios so that
the complete image is copied onto the paper. When this option is selected, a check
mark is displayed in the box.
„Width: 50% / Length: 100%
Allows you to copy originals at 50% of original width and 100% of original length.
When [Calculator%] is Selected
You can specify values for the length and width individually.
If you specify both the original document size and the desired copy size, the copy ratios
for the length and width are calculated automatically within the range from 25 to 400%
according to the values that you entered.
Important • The [Calculator%] screen allows you to specify ratios. [Original Size] and [Copy Size] are the
items into which you enter to calculate ratios. The values entered into [Original Size] and
[Copy Size] will not be reflected in a scan size for the document or paper size. Be sure to
specify a scan size for the document. Also, specify a paper tray when necessary.
For details on how to set a scan size for the document, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size
for the Document)" (P.75). For how to set a paper tray, refer to "Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for
Copying)" (P.61).
1
60
Enter the width of the original
document into [Original Size] of
[Width-X%] using the numeric
keypad.
Copy
2
Enter the width of the output copy into [Copy Size] of [Width-X%] using the numeric
keypad.
3
In the same way, enter the [Original Size] and [Copy Size] of [Length-Y%].
„Width-X% / Length-Y%
Displays the ratios that are automatically calculated using the values entered in
[Original Size] and [Copy Size].
„Original Size
Allows you to enter the width and length of the original document, in the range of 1 to
999 mm in 1 mm increments.
„Copy Size
Allows you to enter the width and length of output copies, in the range of 1 to 999 mm
in 1 mm increments.
Copy
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)
3
This feature allows you to select the tray that holds the paper you want to use.
1
Select a paper tray.
„Auto
Automatically determines the tray holding the appropriate paper, based on the
document size and the specified copy ratio.
Note
• If you select [Auto], specify an option other than [Auto %] in [Reduce/Enlarge].
„Trays (2nd and 3rd Buttons)
Allows you to directly select the desired tray.
You can change the paper tray associated with each button. For information on the settings, refer to "5
Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Defaults" > "Paper Supply" in the Administrator Guide.
„More...
Displays the [Paper Supply] screen.
Refer to "[Paper Supply] Screen" (P.61).
[Paper Supply] Screen
You can select a paper tray from all trays available on the machine.
1
Select a paper tray.
„Auto
Based on the original document size and set ratios, the machine automatically selects
the tray loaded with the appropriate paper.
61
3 Copy
„Trays 1 to 3, and 6
Select paper from 4 trays.
„Bypass...
The [Tray 5] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.62).
[Tray 5] Screen
If you want to use paper that cannot be loaded in Tray 1, 2, or 3, use Tray 5 (Bypass).
1
Select a paper size and a paper
type.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
Copy
• [Auto Size Detect] is available
only when standard sized paper is loaded.
3
„Paper Size
Select from [Auto Size Detect], [Standard Size], and [Custom Size].
When you select [Auto Size Detect], the paper size is identified automatically.
When you select [Standard Size] or [Custom Size (Variable Size)], refer to "When [Standard Size] is
Selected" (P.62) or "When [Custom Size] is Selected" (P.62) respectively.
„Paper Type
Select a paper type.
When [Standard Size] is Selected
Select a paper size from standard paper sizes, and then select a paper type.
1
Select a paper size and a paper
type.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
When [Custom Size] is Selected
Set the X (width) within the range from 99 to 432 mm, and the Y (height) within the
range from 89 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments.
Important • If the X (width) of non-standard size paper is less than 140 mm, documents may not be
printed properly.
• When copying on both sides of non-standard size paper, specify the size within the range
from 139 to 432 mm for the X (horizontal) direction and from 128 to 297 mm for the Y
(vertical) direction.
1
Enter a paper size using [
[ ], and [ ].
2
Select a paper type.
Note
62
], [
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
],
Copy
Output Color (Selecting the Color for Copying)
This feature allows you to select copy colors.
Note
1
• If output color restrictions are set, the available colors will be restricted. For information, refer
to "5 Tools" > "Accounting" > "Create/View User Accounts" > "Account Limit" in the
Administrator Guide.
Select a color mode.
„Auto Detect
Note
• If a color document is in one of the following conditions, the machine may copy the
document in black and white.
- The colored area is too small.
- The colors are too light.
In that case, change a level from the five levels used by the machine when it recognizes
color. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Image Quality
Adjustment" > "Image Quality" > "Output Color Recognition" in the Administrator Guide.
3
„Color
Copies in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.
„Black & White
Copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original document.
„More...
Displays the [Output Color] screen.
[Output Color] Screen
You can make settings for full color, dual color, and single color.
1
2
Copy
The machine automatically determines the colors of the original document and makes
copies in full color if the original document is colored, and in single color (black) if the
document is black-and-white.
Select [More...].
Select the desired output color
mode.
„Auto Detect
Automatically determines the color of the original document and makes copies in full
color if the original document is colored, or in single color (black) if the document is
black-and-white.
„Color
Copies in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.
„Black & White
Copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original document.
63
3 Copy
„Dual Color
Separates the colors of your document into the source colors and the other colors, and
then copies the document using two colors. Selecting [Dual Color] allows you to set the
following:
z
Source Color
The [Source Color] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Source Color] Screen" (P.64).
z
Target Area Color
The [Target Area Color] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Target Area Color] Screen" (P.64).
z
Non-target Area Color
The [Non-target Area Color] screen is displayed.
Copy
Refer to "[Non-target Area Color] Screen" (P.65).
„Single Color
3
The [Output Color - Color] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Output Color - Color] Screen" (P.65).
[Source Color] Screen
This screen allows you to select one or more colors from your document to define them
as source colors.
1
2
Select [Dual Color].
3
Select [Other than Black] or
[Color].
4
If you selected [Color] in step 3,
select the desired source colors.
Select [Source Color].
„Other than Black
The colors other than black will be the source colors.
„Color
Allows you to select one or more source colors from six preset options.
[Target Area Color] Screen
This screen allows you to select the target color to be used in place of the selected
source colors. Available options are seven preset and six custom options.
For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Custom
Colors" in the Administration Guide.
64
Copy
1
2
Select [Dual Color].
3
Select a color.
Select [Target Area Color].
[Non-target Area Color] Screen
This screen allows you to select the color to be used in place of the colors other than
the selected source colors. You can select from seven preset and six custom options.
1
2
Select [Dual Color].
3
Select a color.
3
Select [Non-target Area Color].
[Output Color - Color] Screen
This screen allows you to specify the color to be used for single-color copying.
Available options are six preset and six custom options.
For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Custom
Colors" in the Administrator Guide.
1
2
Select [Single Color].
3
Select a color.
Copy
For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Custom
Colors" in the Administrator Guide.
Select [Color].
65
3 Copy
Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)
This feature is the same as [Image Shift] of the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Refer to "Image Shift
(Adjusting the Image Position)" (P.78).
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)
This feature is the same as [Edge Erase] of the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Refer to "Edge Erase
(Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)" (P.77).
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)
Copy
This feature allows you to select a copy-density level from seven levels. The copy
becomes darker when you move [ ] to the left, and lighter when you move it to the
right.
Note
3
1
66
• [Lighten/Darken] of the [Copy] screen and [Lighten/Darken] of [Lighten/ Darken/Contrast] in
the [Image Quality] screen are the same.
Use [ ] and [
density levels.
] to select from 7
Image Quality
Image Quality
On the [Image Quality] screen, you can configure the image quality features. The
following shows the reference section for each feature.
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .......................................................................... 67
Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density / Sharpness / Saturation of images) .......................... 68
Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents / Adjusting Contrast)...... 69
Color Effects (Selecting an Image Quality) ............................................................................... 69
Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance) ................................................................................. 70
Color Shift (Adjusting the Color Tone) ..................................................................................... 71
1
On the [All Services] screen, select
[Copy].
2
Select the [Image Quality] tab, and
then select a feature on the [Image
Quality] screen.
Copy
If the color reproduction is unsatisfactory, perform calibration. For information on the calibration, refer
to "3 Maintenance" > "Executing Calibration" in the Administrator Guide.
3
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)
This feature allows you to select the type of documents, such as text and photos. By
selecting a document type, you can make copies at optimum image quality.
1
2
Select [Original Type].
Select the original type.
„Auto
Automatically sets the document type based on the setting made in [Tools] and the
setting made in [Output Color] on the [Copy Service Setting] screen.
„Photo & Text
Select this option when the document contains both text and photos. The machine
automatically distinguishes the text and photo areas of the document and sets the
appropriate image quality for each area. To process photo areas, select the photo type
from [Printed Original], [Photograph], and [Photocopy].
z
Printed Original
Select this option when the document contains printed photos, such as a brochure.
z
Photograph
Select this option when the document contains pasted photos. This option prevents
the copy from being reproduced bluish.
z
Photocopy
Select this option when the document is a copy or print made with a color copier such
as this machine. This option prevents the copy from being reproduced faintly.
67
3 Copy
„Text
Select to make copies of text documents. This option is also suitable for graphs and
illustrations.
z
Normal Text
Select this option for printed documents, or for documents written with ink.
z
Light Text
Select this option for text that requires enhancement, such as handwritten pencil text.
z
See-Through Paper
Select this option to reduce blurs of tracing-paper documents or to suppress
background shadows of lightweight documents.
Note
• Whether [See-Through Paper] is displayed on the screen depends on the setting under
[Tools]. For information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" >
"Original Type - See-Through Paper" in the Administrator Guide.
Copy
„Photo
Select to make copies of photos. Select the photo type from the same options as [Photo
& Text]: [Printed Original], [Photograph], and [Photocopy].
3
„Map
Select to make copies of documents that have text placed on color backgrounds, such
as maps.
Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density / Sharpness / Saturation of
images)
This feature allows you to adjust the copy density, sharpness, and saturation levels.
Note
• [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] and [Lighten/Darken] of [Copy] are the same.
• If [Lighten/Darken], [Sharpness], or [Saturation] is set concurrently with [Color Effects], the
setting made for [Color Effects] will be cleared.
1
2
Select [Image Options].
Adjust the copy density, sharpness,
and saturation with [ ] and [ ].
„Lighten/Darken
Allows you to select from seven copy density levels between [Lighten] and [Darken].
Moving the arrow mark to the upper position makes the copy density lighter, and
moving to the lower position makes darker.
„Sharpness
Allows you to select from five sharpness levels between [Soften] and [Sharpen].
Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the contours of images sharper, and selecting
a lower cell makes softer.
„Saturation
Allows you to select from five saturation levels between [Vivid] and [Pastel].
Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes colors brighter, and selecting a lower cell
makes less bright.
68
Image Quality
Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents /
Adjusting Contrast)
This feature allows you to suppress the background color of documents, such as
newspaper and color paper. You can also adjust the contrast.
Note
• When [Original Type] is set to [Photo], the [Image Enhancement] feature does not work.
• If [Background Suppression] or [Contrast] is set, the setting made for [Color Effects] will be
cleared.
1
2
Select [Image Enhancement].
Set [Image Enhancement] and
[Contrast]. Adjust the contrast with
[ ] and [ ].
„Background Suppression
Copy
z
No Suppression
Scans document backgrounds with no filtering.
z
3
Auto Suppression
When [Output Color] is set to [Black], the background of a document printed on
colored paper, such as newspaper, will be suppressed.
When [Output Color] is set to [Color], [Dual Color] or [Single Color], the background
of a document printed on white-color paper will be suppressed.
Note
• When [Output Color] is set to [Color], you can change the level of background suppression.
For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" > "Background
Suppression Level" in the Administrator Guide.
„Contrast
z
Auto Correction
Automatically adjusts the brightness and hue of the original document to sharpen the
image.
Note
z
• [Auto Correction] is not available when the Document Feeder is used.
Manual Contrast
Allows you to select from the five levels between [Most Contrast] and [Least
Contrast].
Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas
greater; light areas become lighter and dark areas darker.
In contrast, selecting a lower cell on the bar makes the difference between light and
dark areas smaller.
Color Effects (Selecting an Image Quality)
If you set this feature, the [Image Enhancement], [Image Options], [Color Shift], and
[Color Balance] settings are automatically adjusted and copies are made at the
specified quality.
Note
• If other image-quality settings are made after you set [Color Effects], the Color Effects
setting will return to its default.
69
3 Copy
1
2
Select [Color Effects].
Select an image quality.
„Off
Copies with the [Image Enhancement], [Image Options], [Color Shift], and [Color
Balance] settings at their defaults.
„Lively
Reproduces fresher, livelier images with increased color saturation.
„Bright
Copy
Reproduces brighter images with enhanced contrast. This option is suitable for
documents that are intended to attract people's attention, such as posters.
„Warm
3
Reproduces brighter, warmer, more reddish images. This option is suitable when skin
tones are to be reproduced more pinkish or when subdued images are to be
reproduced more warmly.
„Cool
Reproduces clearer blue colors. This option is suitable for water and sky images, and
is also suitable when smoky blue colors are to be reproduced more clearly.
„Shadow Suppression
Suppresses the colors on the reverse side of the original document from being
reproduced in the copy.
Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance)
This feature allows you to adjust the Low, Medium, and High density levels of the four
CMYK toner colors (cyan, magenta, yellow and black).
Note
1
2
3
• If [Color Balance] is set, the Color Effects setting will be cleared.
Select [Color Balance].
Select a color.
Use [ ] and [ ] to adjust the color
balance for each density.
„Highlights
Allows you to adjust the color strength of low-density areas.
„Midtones
Allows you to adjust the color strength of medium-density areas.
„Shadows
Allows you to adjust the color strength of high-density areas.
70
Image Quality
Color Shift (Adjusting the Color Tone)
This feature allows you to adjust the tone of the colors to be reproduced in copies, by
a maximum of two levels in two directions.
On the screen, the [Original Color] bar represents the color tone of the original
document, and the [Copy Color] bar represents the color tone of output copies.
Selecting a button on the screen moves the [Original Color] bar to adjust the tone of the
colors.
When the [Original Color] bar is moved to the left, the Y (yellow) cell on the [Original
Color] bar becomes closer to the R (red) cell on the [Copy Color] bar, and thus a yellow
fruit appears more reddish and riper-looking. At the same time, the tone of all the other
colors changes. The red color appears more magentish, and the green color appears
more yellowish.
Note
• Ensure that [Color] has been selected in [Output Color] on the [Copy] screen. The Color
Shift feature is not available when [Output Color] is set to [Black].
3
• If [Color Shift] is set, the Color Effects setting will be cleared.
1
2
Copy
Conversely, when the [Original Color] bar is moved to the right, the Y (yellow) cell on
the [Original Color] bar becomes closer to the G (green) cell on the [Copy Color] bar,
and thus a yellow fruit appears more greenish. At the same time, the tone of all the
other colors changes. The magenta color appears more reddish, and the red color
appears more yellowish.
Select [Color Shift].
Select a button to adjust the color
tone.
71
3 Copy
Layout Adjustment
On the [Layout Adjustment] screen, you can configure features for scanning
documents.
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies) ................................................................................72
Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) ...................................................73
2 Sided Book Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages) ............................................74
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document).......................................................75
Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) .........................76
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) .........................................77
Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position) ...............................................................................78
Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images)...............................................................80
Copy
Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images) ...................................................................81
Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents) .................................81
3
1
On the [All Services] screen, select
[Copy].
2
Select the [Layout Adjustment] tab,
and then select a feature on the
[Layout Adjustment] screen.
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies)
Copies of 1-sided and 2-sided documents can be made on one side or both sides of a
paper.
Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting are the
same.
• When the Finisher-B1 is installed, and if paper of different size from the specified size is
loaded for 2-sided copying, output copies are delivered to the center tray. Remove the paper
delivered to the center tray every now and then.
1
2
Select [2-Sided Copying].
Select any item.
„1 J 1 Sided
Makes a copy of a 1-sided document on one side of paper.
„1 J 2 Sided
Makes a copy of a 1-sided document on both sides of paper.
„2 J 2 Sided
Makes a copy of a 2-sided document on both sides of paper.
72
Layout Adjustment
„2 J 1 Sided
Makes a copy of a 2-sided document on one side of paper.
„Originals
z
Head to Head
Select this item when the front and back faces of the document are in the same
orientation.
z
Head to Toe
Select this item when the front and back faces of the document are in opposite
orientations.
This item appears when [2 J 2 Sided] or [2 J 1 Sided] is selected.
„Copies
z
Select this item when you want the orientation of the front and back sides of the copy
to be the same as that of the document.
z
Head to Toe
Select this item when you want the orientation of the first and second sides of the
copy to be the opposite of that of the document.
This appears when [1 J 2 Sided] or [2 J 2 Sided] is selected.
Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)
This feature allows you to copy facing pages of a document on separate sheets of
paper in page order.
It is useful if you need to make separate copies of facing pages of a bound document
such as a booklet.
Note
• You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.
• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.
• If you want the sheets to be output in the page order, set [Output Orientation] to [Face Down]
on the [Output Format] tab.
1
2
Select [Book Copying].
Select any item.
„Off
Does not copy as a bound document.
„Left Page then Right
Copies the left page and then the right page of facing pages.
„Right Page then Left
Copies the right page and then the left page of facing pages.
„Top Page then Bottom
Copies the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages.
73
Copy
Head to Head
3
3 Copy
„Both Pages
Copies both pages in page order.
„Left Page Only
Copies the left page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right
Page then Left] is selected.
„Right Page Only
Copies the right page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or
[Right Page then Left] is selected.
„Top Page Only
Copies the top page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is
selected.
Copy
„Bottom Page Only
Copies the bottom page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom]
is selected.
3
„Binding Edge Erase
Erases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding
erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
2 Sided Book Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)
You can assign pages when making copies of facing pages in a bound document so
that pages face each other in the same way as the document. You can also specify the
start page and the end page from the left and right of facing pages.
Important • Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.
1
2
Select [2 Sided Book Copying].
Select any item.
„Off
Disables this feature.
„Left Page then Right
Scans the left page and then the right page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies.
„Right Page then Left
Scans the right page and then the left page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies.
„Top Page then Bottom
Scans the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies.
„Start & End Pages
Displays the [Starting & Ending Pages] screen.
Refer to "[Starting & Ending Pages] Screen" (P.75).
74
Layout Adjustment
„Binding Edge Erase
Erases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding
erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
[Starting & Ending Pages] Screen
You can set the copy start page and end page.
1
Set [Starting Page] and [Ending
Page].
„Starting Page
Select the copy start page from the following items.
[Left Page] / [Right Page]
You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is
selected.
z
[Top Page] / [Bottom Page]
You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.
„Ending Page
Select the copy end page from the following items.
z
[Left Page] / [Right Page]
You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is
selected.
z
[Top Page] / [Bottom Page]
You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)
This feature allows you to set the scan size for a document.
Use this feature when your document is a non-standard size, or when you want to copy
your document at a size different from the original size.
You can add margins, or delete unnecessary margins using this feature.
1
2
Select [Original Size].
Select the size of the document.
If you select a non-standard size,
specify values for the X and Y
directions.
75
Copy
z
3
3 Copy
„Auto Detect
Detects the document size automatically. The document sizes that can be detected are
as follows:
Document Feeder
Autodetectable
Document Sizes
Document Glass
B5, B5 , B4, A5, A5 , A4, B6, B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5,
A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11 inches, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11 inches , 11 x 17 inches , 11 x 17 inches,
inches, 16K , 8K
Note
16K, 16K , 8K
• If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size
appears.
The document sizes that can be automatically detected depend on [Paper Size Settings] made in the
System Administration mode. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other
Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
Copy
„Standard Size
Select a document size from 17 options.
3
You can change the sizes displayed on the screen. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" >
"Copy Service Settings" > "Original Size Defaults" in the Administrator Guide.
„Variable Size
Enter the desired scan size when scanning a non-standard size document or when
making copies at a size different from the original document size. You can specify a
value in the range of 15 to 432 mm for the width (X), and a value in the range of 15 to
297 mm for the height (Y), in 1 mm increments. The scales attached on the upper and
left edges of the document glass will help you specify values.
Important • When the document is loaded on the document feeder, the base point in the Y (height)
direction is the center of the edge. If you specify 100 mm, the scan height will be from 50 mm
above to 50 mm below the center of the document.
Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents
Simultaneously)
When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously scan different size
documents and make copies onto paper that matches the respective sizes of the
documents. You can also specify the size of the paper to make copies on, so that
copies are made on the same size of paper.
Important • Ensure that the orientation of the first sheet of the document and the [Original Orientation]
setting are the same.
• Always load A5 documents in portrait orientation.
• When loading B5 documents together with A3 documents loaded in landscape orientation or
A4 documents loaded in portrait orientation, load B5 documents in portrait orientation.
• If the top left corners of the documents are not aligned properly, the documents may not be
scanned correctly.
• The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5
portrait and B4 landscape. If another combination of document sizes is used, the documents
can be fed at an angle and may not be copied properly.
Note
76
• The [Original Orientation] setting is based on the orientation of the first page of a document.
Load the second and subsequent pages of the document in consideration of this setting.
Layout Adjustment
1
2
Select [Mixed Sized Originals].
Select [On].
„Off
Select this item when all documents are of the same size.
„On
When documents of different sizes are copied, the machine automatically detects the
size of each document.
When you copy a document with the document cover open or when you copy a book,
the edges and center margin of the document may be printed as black shadows. The
Edge Erase feature allows you to erase such shadows.
Important • Ensure that the orientation of the first sheet of the document and the [Original Orientation]
setting are the same.
Note
• For 2-sided originals, the same edge erase amounts are set for the front and back sides.
• If you set [Reduce/Enlarge], the edge erase amounts will be reduced or enlarged in
proportion to the ratio you configured.
For information on the areas that can actually be printed, refer to "15 Appendix" > "Printable Area" in
the Administrator Guide.
1
2
Select [Edge Erase].
Select any item.
„All Edges
Erases the shadows of the four edges of a document, and also the shadow in the center
of the document if it is a bound document. You can specify values for [4 Edges] and
[Center] individually.
„Parallel Edges
Erases the shadows of the top and bottom edges, and left and right edges of a
document, and also the shadow in the center of the document if it is a bound document.
You can specify values for [Top & Bottom], [Left & Right], and [Center] individually.
„Erase Value
Allows you to specify Edge Erase values.
z
Top & Bottom (Top/Bottom)
Erases the shadows of top and bottom edges of the document in accordance with
the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the
range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
z
Left & Right (Left/Right)
Erases the shadows of left and right edges of the document in accordance with the
orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the
range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
77
Copy
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)
3
3 Copy
z
Center
Erases the shadow in the center of facing pages of a bound document. You can set
the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.
Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)
This feature allows you to shift the position of document images so that the images are
placed on the left, right, top, bottom, or center of paper. You can also adjust the
amounts of the left, right, top, and bottom margins. If you make 2-sided copies, you can
adjust the image positions for [Side 1] and [Side 2] individually.
Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting are the
same.
Note
Copy
1
2
• The settings made for the Image Shift feature are set in accordance with paper. They are not
affected by the Reduce/Enlarge settings.
Select [Image Shift].
Select any item.
3
„No Shift
Does not shift the position of document images.
„Auto Center
Shifts document images so that they are placed in the center of paper.
„Margin Shift
Allows you to adjust margins. Set the amounts of the top & bottom, and left & right
margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
z
Side 1
Displays the [Image Shift - Side 1] screen.
Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen" (P.79).
z
Side 2
Displays the [Image Shift - Side 2] screen.
Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 2] Screen" (P.79).
z
Mirror Side 1
Select this item when you want the positioning of Side 2 to match the positioning of
Side 1.
78
Layout Adjustment
[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen
You can make settings for Side 1.
1
Select any item.
„No Shift
Does not shift the position of document images.
„Auto Center
Shifts document images so that they are placed in the center of paper.
To make fine adjustments, set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right
margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Shifts document images so that they are placed at an edge or corner of paper. You can
select from 8 shift directions.
To make fine adjustments, set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right
margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
„Margin Shift
Allows you to adjust margins. Set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right
margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
[Image Shift - Side 2] Screen
You can make settings for Side 2.
1
Select any item.
„No Shift
Does not shift the position of document images.
„Auto Center
Shifts document images so that they are placed in the center of paper.
To make fine adjustments, set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right
margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
„Corner Shift
Shifts document images so that they are placed at an edge or corner of paper. You can
select from 8 shift directions.
To make fine adjustments, set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right
margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
„Margin Shift
Allows you to adjust margins. Set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right
margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
79
Copy
„Corner Shift
3
3 Copy
Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images)
If the orientation of the paper currently loaded in the tray differs from that of your
document, the machine automatically rotates the document image to fit on the paper.
You can also select a reference position for image rotation if documents are of mixed
orientations.
This feature is available only when copies are made using A4, 8.5 x 11", or smaller size
paper.
1
2
Select [Image Rotation].
Select any item.
„Off
Copy
Copies documents as they are, even if they are orientated differently.
„Always On
3
Automatically rotates document images so that the orientation of the images matches
that of the paper.
„On during Auto
Automatically rotates document images so that the orientation of the images matches
that of the paper only when [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] or [Auto] of [Paper Supply] is
selected.
„Rotation Direction
Displays the [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] screen.
Refer to "[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen" (P.80).
[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen
You can set the reference position for rotation.
1
Select any item.
„Staple Position
When the finisher is installed, [Staple Position] is displayed.
If documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated to match the stapling
edge specified in the settings of the Staple feature.
„Portrait Original - Left Edge
If documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated so that the top edge of
landscape documents is aligned with the left edge of portrait documents.
„Portrait Original - Right Edge
If documents are of mixed orientations, the image will be rotated so that the top edge
of landscape documents is aligned with the right edge of portrait documents.
80
Layout Adjustment
Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images)
This feature allows you to invert document images to make mirror and negative images.
Note
• When Output Color is set to [Black] or [Single Color], the black color on the document is
inverted to white, and the white color to black.
• When Output Color is set to [Color], the colors are inverted to their complementary colors.
• When [Negative Image] and [Edge Erase] are set simultaneously, the edge erase area turns
to white.
1
2
Select [Invert Image].
Select any item.
„Mirror Image
Copy
Creates a mirror image of the document.
„Negative Image
3
Creates a negative image of the document.
Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents)
This feature allows you to specify the orientation of a document to have the machine
identify the top of the document.
Note
1
2
• If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine
may mistakenly detect the top of the document.
Select [Original Orientation].
Select [Upright Images] or
[Sideway Images] in accordance
with the orientation of the
document loaded.
„Upright Images
Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the
document glass or document feeder.
„Sideways Images
Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the
document glass or document feeder.
81
3 Copy
Output Format
On the [Output Format] screen, you can configure features for outputting documents.
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies) ................................................................................72
Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options) .............................................................................82
Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) .......................................................................................84
Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies) .........................................................................................87
Transparency Options (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)..................................88
Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet) ............................................................89
Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets).................................................90
Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet) .............................................................91
Copy
Annotations (Adding a Comment / a Date / Page Numbers to Copies)......................................91
Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies) .....................................96
Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded Paper)........................................................................................98
Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)............................................98
3
ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card)..............................................................99
1
On the [All Services] screen, select
[Copy].
2
Select the [Output Format] tab, and
then select a feature on the [Output
Format] screen.
2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies)
This feature is the same as [2 Sided Copying] of the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Refer to "2 Sided
Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies)" (P.72).
Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)
This feature allows you to select finishing options.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
If a finisher is installed, each set of copies can be stapled, and then output.
When the Finisher-B1 and Hole Punch Kit is installed, copies can be punched.
82
Output Format
1
2
Select [Copy Output].
Select any item.
Note
• Items displayed vary based on
a finisher installed.
„Auto
Copies are collated when any of the following features is used: auto document feeder,
2 Sided Book Copy, Covers, [Blank Separators & Handouts] or [Transparency Set &
Handouts] of Transparency Separators, Booklet Creation, Stapling, Build Job, Sample
Set, and Combine Original Sets.
„Collated/Staple/Punch
The machine outputs sheets sorted into sets that are arranged in page order.
„Uncollated
Copy
The machine outputs the specified number of copies and sorts sheets by page.
„Uncollated with Separators
3
The machine outputs copies with inserting blank sheets as a separator and sorts
sheets by page.
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] is displayed. For details, refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.62).
„Staple
Displays the [Copy Output] screen.
Refer to "[Copy Output] Screen" (P.83).
„Hole Punch
Displays the [Copy Output - Hole Punch] screen.
Refer to "[Copy Output-Hole Punch] Screen" (P.84).
Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.
• When the punching feature of a finisher is defective, paper is delivered to the center tray
instead of the finisher tray. Remove the paper delivered to the center tray every now and
then.
„Output Destination
Allows you to select an output destination.
Note
• This function may not appear depending on the model of the machine, and optional
equipment is required for use. For more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
[Copy Output] Screen
Sets the position for stapling. The number of pages that can be stapled is 2 to 50 (when
using 80 g/m2 paper).
Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.
1
Select the stapling position.
83
3 Copy
„No Staple
Stapling is not performed.
„Staple Position
Select from five staple positions.
1 Staple
z
2 Staples, Top
z
1 Staple, Right
z
2 Staples
z
2 Staples, Right
Important • In the following cases, the actual stapling position will be different from the stapling position
specified on the screen:
- When placing documents in Head to Top orientation and stapling at the upper-right corner
of paper
- When placing documents in Head to Left orientation and stapling at the upper-left corner of
paper
Copy
3
z
[Copy Output-Hole Punch] Screen
You can set the position for punching.
Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.
• The 3-hole setting is optional. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Our customer engineer will make the necessary settings.
1
Set the position for punching.
„No Punch
No punching position is selected.
„2 Holes
Select the position for punching from 2 Holes Left, 2 Holes Top, and 2 Holes Right.
Note
• When 2/4 Hole Punch Kit is installed, the spacing between the holes are 80 mm.
• When US 2/3 Hole Punch Kit is installed, the spacing between the holes are 70 mm (US
standard).
„4 Holes
This button is displayed when 2/4 Hole Punch Kit is installed.
Select the position for punching from 4 Holes Left, 4 Holes Top, and 4 Holes Right.
„3 Holes
This button is displayed when US 2/3 Hole Punch Kit is installed.
Select the position for punching from 3 Holes Left, 3 Holes Top, and 3 Holes Right.
Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)
This feature lays out pages so that booklets are formed when the output sheets are
folded in half. You can also set the binding shift and attach a cover when making
booklets.
When the Finisher-B1 with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed, you can also crease
the output sheets in half, or staple the creased output sheets.
84
Output Format
Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.
• When the Finisher-B1 is installed, do not remove paper from the finisher tray until all the
output sheets have been delivered.
Note
• As the machine copies four pages of the document onto one sheet of paper, if the number of
pages in the booklet is not a multiple of four, the remaining pages will be output as blank
pages.
• If [Auto Paper Select] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is
automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary. For information on [Auto Paper
Off], refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" in the Administrator
Guide.
1
2
Select [Booklet Creation].
Select any item.
Copy
„Off
Disables this feature.
3
„Create Left/Top Bound Booklet
Copies are made to enable left binding or top binding.
„Create Right Bound Booklet
Copies are made to enable right binding.
„Copy Booklet
You can output the copies of scanned documents as they are by specifying Bi-fold/
Stapling. Select this when you do not need a document to be copied in booklet page
order.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
„Binding Shift
Displays the [Booklet Creation-Binding Shift] screen.
Refer to "[Booklet Creation-Binding Shift] Screen" (P.86).
„Covers
Displays the [Booklet Creation-Covers] screen.
Refer to "[Booklet Creation-Covers] Screen" (P.86).
„Divide Output
Displays the [Booklet Creation-Divide Output] screen.
Refer to "[Booklet Creation-Divide Output] Screen" (P.86).
„Fold & Staple
Displays the [Booklet Creation-Fold & Staple] screen.
Refer to "[Booklet Creation-Fold & Staple] Screen" (P.87).
This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.
85
3 Copy
„Last Page on Back Cover
Selecting this check box copies the image of the last document page onto the last page
of the copy sheets as a back cover. When you use [Divide Output] to divide a booklet
into subsets, the image of the last document page will be copied onto the last page of
the last subset.
Note
• Depending on the number of pages in the original, a blank page may be added before the
last booklet page.
„Paper Supply
Displays the [Booklet Creation-Paper Supply] screen.
Select the tray to be used for body pages from [Main Body Tray], and the tray for cover
pages from [Cover Tray]. The orientation and size of paper loaded in the trays must be
the same.
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5]
Screen" (P.62).
Copy
[Booklet Creation-Binding Shift] Screen
You can set the binding shift value within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm
increments.
3
1
Use [ ] and [ ] or numeric
keypad to specify a binding shift
value.
[Booklet Creation-Covers] Screen
You can attach a cover to a booklet.
1
2
Select [On].
Select any item.
„Covers
z
Blank Covers
A blank sheet of paper is attached as the cover.
z
Front Cover - 2 Sided
The first page of the document is copied on the cover. When you only want to copy
to the outside of the cover, insert a blank sheet of paper for the page that will become
the inside of the cover.
„Paper Supply
Displays the [Booklet Creation-Covers-Paper Supply] screen.
Select the tray to use from [Main Body Tray] and [Covers Tray]. Select trays with paper
of the same size and orientation for the copy paper and the cover.
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. Refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.62).
[Booklet Creation-Divide Output] Screen
When you have a large number of originals, the originals are divided to create subsets
to reduce the thickness of each booklet. The machine folds copies in half, and piles
86
Output Format
them up to form a booklet. You can specify the number of sheets within the range of 1
- 50 in 1-sheet increments.
Note
1
2
• When specifying [Folding], set the dividing number of sheets in the range from 1 to 15.
Select [On].
Set the number of copies using [
and [ ] or with the numeric
keypad.
]
[Booklet Creation-Fold & Staple] Screen
When the Finisher-B1 with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed, [Fold Only] and [Fold
& Staple] becomes available.
1
Select any item.
Note
Copy
• Items displayed vary based on
a finisher installed.
3
„No Fold & Staple
No Finishing is carried out.
„Fold Only
Displayed when the Finisher-B1 with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed.
The copies are creased in half. The number of copies that can be creased is up to 5.
When the number is more than 5, the document is divided by every 5 sheets.
„Fold & Staple
Displayed when the Finisher-B1 with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed.
The copies are creased in half and stapled at the center. The number of copies that can
be treated is 2 to 15.
Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies)
This feature allows you to attach covers to copies.
Different types of paper (such as colored paper and heavyweight paper) can be used
as the front and back covers of copies.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• When making 2-sided copies, copies are made on both sides of the top cover/back cover in
accordance with the page order of the document.
• If [Auto Paper Select] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is
automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary. For information on [Auto Paper
Off], refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" in the Administrator
Guide.
1
2
Select [Covers].
Select any item.
87
3 Copy
„No Covers
Does not attach covers.
„Front Cover Only
Attaches a front cover to copies. You can use a different type of paper as the cover. If
[Printed Covers] is selected under [Covers], the first page of the original document is
copied onto the front cover.
„Front & Back Covers
Attaches front and back covers to copies. You can use a different type of paper as the
covers. If [Printed Covers] is selected under [Covers], the first and last pages of the
original document are copied onto the front and back covers respectively.
„Covers
z
Blank Covers
Copy
Blank sheets of paper are attached as covers.
z
3
Printed Covers
The first page of the document is copied on the front side of a cover sheet. To make
the back side of the cover sheet blank, insert a blank page after the first page of the
original document.
„Paper Supply
Displays the [Covers-Paper Supply] screen.
Select the tray to be used for body pages from [Main Body Tray], and a tray for covers
from [Covers Tray]. The orientation and size of paper loaded in the trays must be the
same.
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5]
Screen" (P.62).
Important • [Auto Size Detect] of [Tray 5] cannot be selected as [Covers Tray].
Transparency Options (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)
This feature allows you to insert blank separators between output transparency sheets.
At the same time, you can make copies for handouts.
Important • Using transparency sheets for color (V556/V558 [with white border]) may cause a
malfunction or paper jam.
Note
• When loading A4 size transparencies on Tray 5 (bypass), we recommend loading them
vertically.
• Transparency sheets must be loaded in a tray in the same orientation as the paper to be
used for handouts and separators.
1
2
Select [Transparency Options].
Select any item.
„No Transparency Separators
Does not insert separators.
88
Output Format
„Blank Transparency Separators
Inserts a separator each time a transparency is used for copying. Only one set of
copies can be made.
„Blank Separators & Handouts
Inserts a separator each time a transparency is used for copying. At the same time, the
required number of copies is made for handouts.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
„Transparency Set & Handouts
Makes copies using transparencies. At the same time, the required number of copies
is made for handouts.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Copy
„Paper Supply
Displays the [Transparency Options - Paper Supply] screen. Select the tray to use.
3
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. Refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.62).
Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)
2, 4, or 8 pages of a document can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.
When you select [Multiple-Up], [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected automatically.
The machine automatically sets the copy ratio and makes copies of the images so that
they fit on the selected paper.
Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.
Note
• When [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is cancelled (a new copy ratio is selected), image loss
may occur depending on the size of the document image.
• When Image Shift is set, shift is executed on the whole document. For this reason, image
loss at the edge of the original may occur depending on the size of the document image.
• When Edge Erase is set, it is carried out for each document page.
• Select other than [Auto] for a tray to be selected for [Paper Supply] on the [Copy] screen. If
[Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically selected.
Change the setting as necessary. For information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service
Settings" > "Copy Control" > "Auto Paper Off" in the Administrator Guide.
1
2
Select [Multiple-Up].
Select any item.
„Off
Disables this feature.
„2 Pages Up
Copies two document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper.
„4 Pages Up
Copies four document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper.
89
3 Copy
„8 Pages Up
Copies eight document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper.
„Reading Order
Allows you to select how to lay out images on a page.
Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)
An enlarged copy of a document can be made spread over multiple sheets.
This feature allows you to create a large poster by pasting together the copies spread
over multiple sheets. Copied sheets are provided with a paste margin so that they can
be pasted together. The paste margin is fixed to 10 mm.
Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.
Copy
Note
1
2
3
• This feature is not supported by the document feeder.
Select [Poster].
Select any item.
„No Posters
No enlarged copies are made.
„Output Size
You can select paper sizes.
„Enlargement %
Refer to "When [Enlargement %] is Selected" (P.90).
„Paper Supply
Displays the [Poster - Paper Supply] screen.
Select the paper tray to use.
When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. Refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.62).
When [Enlargement %] is Selected
You can specify a different ratio for the height and width.
1
Use [ ] and [ ] to specify the
height and width ratios.
„Width X/Length Y
Set the height and width ratios within the range from 100 to 400% in 1% increments.
„Lock X - Y %
You can simultaneously change the numerical values of the height and width by the
same amount.
90
Output Format
Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)
This feature allows you to copy a document image on one sheet of paper repeatedly
for a specified number of times.
When the copy ratio is set to [Auto], the repeated copies of the image are reduced to
fit on the selected paper. You can also specify how the repeated copies of the image
are arranged.
Note
• When making copies at the same size as the document image, specify a number of repeats
so that the copies fit on the paper.
• If [Auto Paper Select] is set for [Paper Supply], the tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is
automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary. For information on [Auto Paper
Off], refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" in the Administrator
Guide.
1
2
Select [Repeat Image].
Select any item.
Copy
3
„Off
Disables this feature.
„Auto Repeat
Automatically determines the number of copies according to the document size, paper
size, and copy ratio, and then repeatedly copies the document image onto the paper.
Note
• Copies cannot be made when the document image is larger than the specified paper size.
„Variable Repeat
Specify how many copies to place along each of the long and short edges of paper.
You can specify a value between 1 and 23 for the length in the Y direction and a value
between 1 and 33 for the length in the X direction.
„Image Layout
z
Evenly Spaced
The specified number of images are evenly arranged on the paper.
z
Side by Side
The specified number of images are arranged with no space on the paper.
Annotations (Adding a Comment / a Date / Page Numbers to Copies)
This feature allows you to add a comment, a date, and page numbers onto copies.
You can select comment, date, and page-number styles, and their print positions.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• The Reduce/Enlarge feature does not affect the annotation image and text sizes.
• If you specify [Stamp], [Date], and [Page Number] together, make sure that their print
positions do not overlap.
• When the [Multiple-Up] feature is used, an annotation is added to each copy page.
• When the [Repeat Image] or [Booklet Creation] feature is used, an annotation is added to
each copy image.
91
3 Copy
1
2
Select [Annotations].
Select any item.
„Comment
Displays the [Comment] screen.
Refer to "[Comment] Screen" (P.92).
„Date Stamp
Displays the [Date Stamp] screen.
Refer to "[Date Stamp] Screen" (P.93).
„Page Numbers
Displays the [Page Numbers] screen.
Copy
3
Refer to "[Page Numbers] Screen" (P.93).
[Comment] Screen
This screen allows you to select a comment style and a comment position.
1
Select any item.
„Off
No comment is added.
„Comment
A comment is added.
„Stored Comments
Displays the [Stored Comments] screen.
You can select comment text from eight options, or from user-defined text strings.
For information on how to register text, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark"
> "Custom Watermark 1 to 3" in the Administrator Guide.
„Apply To
Displays the [Apply Comment To] screen.
You can select whether to add a stamp onto the first copy page only, or onto each copy
page.
„Position
Displays the [Comment - Position] screen.
You can select a comment position from nine options.
„Format & Style
Displays the [Comment - Format & Style] screen.
You can select a comment size from three options, or can directly specify a size in the
range of 6 to 64 points in 1 point increments. You can also select a font color from
seven options.
92
Output Format
Note
• When setting [Date Stamp] and [Page Numbers] at the same time, [Black] is specified for the
color of comment.
[Date Stamp] Screen
This screen allows you to add a date to copies. The date shows when you started
copying the document.
You can change the date format. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" >
"Watermark" > "Date Format" in the Administrator Guide.
1
Select any item.
„Off
No date is added.
Copy
„Date Stamp
A date is added.
„Apply To
Displays the [Apply Date Stamp To] screen.
You can select whether to add a date onto the first copy page only, or onto each copy
page.
„Position
Displays the [Date Stamp - Position] screen.
You can select a date position from six options.
„Font Size
Displays the [Date Stamp - Font Size] screen.
You can select a date size from three options, or can directly specify a size in the range
of 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.
[Page Numbers] Screen
This screen allows you to select a page-number style.
1
Select any item.
„Off
No page number is added.
„Page Numbers
Adds page numbers to copies.
„Style
z
1, 2, 3
Adds page numbers only.
z
-1-, -2-, -3Adds page numbers, and hyphens before and after each page number.
(Example: -1-)
93
3
3 Copy
z
1/N, 2/N, 3/N
Adds page numbers, and the total number of pages to the right of each page number.
(Example: 1/50, 2/50)
When [1/N, 2/N, 3/N] is selected, select either [Auto] or [Enter Numbers] to specify
the total number of pages.
z
N: Total Pages
- Auto
Automatically calculates the total number of pages.
- Enter Number
Allows you to manually specify the total number of pages in the range of 1 to 999.
z
Page1, Page2, Page3
Copy
Adds page numbers, and the text "Page" before each page number.
(Example: Page1, Page2)
„Apply To
Displays the [Apply Page Numbers To] screen.
3
Refer to "[Apply Page Numbers To] Screen" (P.94).
„Position
Displays the [Page Numbers - Position] screen.
You can select a page-number position from six options.
„Font Size
Displays the [Page Numbers - Font Size] screen.
You can select a page-number size from three options, or can directly specify a size in
the range of 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.
[Apply Page Numbers To] Screen
This screen allows you to specify a page range to add page numbers.
1
Select any item.
„All Pages
Adds page numbers to all copy pages.
„Starting Page Number
Allows you to specify the start page to add a page number, in the range of 1 to 999.
Note
• Use [
] and [
], or the numeric keypad and enter the start page number.
„Ending Page Number
Allows you to specify the end page to add a page number, in the range of 1 to 999. The
start page is fixed to "1".
Note
94
• Use [
] and [
], or the numeric keypad and enter the end page number.
Output Format
„Starting & Ending Page Numbers
Allows you to specify the start and end pages to add page numbers, in the range of 1
to 999.
Note
• Use [
] and [
], or the numeric keypad and enter the start and end page numbers.
„Include Covers
Available when [All Pages] is selected. Select this to include covers and separators,
place a check mark.
„Starting Number (when [Page Numbers] is selected)
You can enter a value within the range from 1 to 999.
Note
• Use [
] and [
], or the numeric keypad and enter a starting page number.
„Starting Number (when [Bates Stamp] is selected)
Note
• Use [
] and [
], or the numeric keypad and enter a starting page number.
3
When [Bates Stamp] is Selected
This screen allows you to select prefix text and to specify the number of digits to be
used for page numbers.
1
Copy
You can enter a value within the range from 1 to 999,999,999 if the number of digits is
not specified at [Number of Digits] or within the range (1 to 9) if the number of digits is
specified.
Select any item.
„Stored Prefixes
Allows you to use the screen keyboard to enter prefix text up to 16 characters.
„Number of Digits
Displays the [Bates Stamp - Number of Digits] screen.
You can specify the number of digits to be used for page numbers, between 1 and 9
digits in 1 digit increments.
„Apply To
Displays the [Apply Page Numbers To] screen.
Refer to "[Apply Page Numbers To] Screen" (P.94).
„Position
Displays the [Page Numbers - Position] screen.
You can select a prefix and page-number position from six options.
„Font Size
Displays the [Page Numbers - Font Size] screen.
You can select a prefix and page-number size from three options, or can directly
specify a size in the range of 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.
95
3 Copy
Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies)
You can faintly print a sequential control number in the background of each copy page.
If you set 1 as the starting number, 1 is printed on each page of the first copy set and
2 is printed on each page of the second set.
To prevent, for instance, the duplication of confidential documents that are to be
distributed at a conference, you can use this feature to add sequential numbers to the
copies, and associate the numbers with the conference members.
Note
1
2
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Select [Watermark].
Select any item.
Copy
„Control Number
Displays the [Watermark - Control Number] screen.
3
z
Off
No control number is printed.
z
On
A control number is printed. Enter the starting number of the control number. You can
set a control number within the range from 1 to 999. Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric
keypad and enter the value.
„Stored Watermarks
Displays the [Stored Watermarks] screen.
Refer to "[Stored Watermarks] Screen" (P.97).
„User Account Number
Displays the [Watermark - User Account Number] screen.
When using User Administration or Account Administration, a user account number is
printed. However, if a user is not authenticated, nothing will be printed.
Note
• [User Account Number] is the No. (User Administration Number) registered by users in
Account Administration.
• This screen is displayed when the Account Administration feature is enabled. If the
Authentication and Account Administration feature is used, [User Account Number] is
displayed even when no data is collected. In this case, even if [On] is selected for [User
Account Number], the No. registered by users (User Administration Number) is not printed.
„Date & Time
Displays the [Watermark - Date & Time] screen.
You can print the date and time that the copy job started.
For information about the format for the date, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" >
"Watermark" > "Date Format" in the Administrator Guide.
z
Off
No date or time is printed.
z
On
The date and time are printed.
96
Output Format
„Machine Serial Number
The serial number of the machine is printed.
„Watermark Effect
Displays the [Watermark Effect] screen.
Refer to "[Watermark Effect] Screen" (P.97).
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
[Stored Watermarks] Screen
Select the text to print on the copy.
1
2
Select [On].
Select any text.
Copy
3
„Off
No text is printed.
„On
Text is printed. You can select the text used for watermark. You can specify text from
3 preset texts or the text set in the System Administration mode.
For information on how to register text, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark"
> "Custom Watermark 1 to 3" in the Administrator Guide.
[Watermark Effect] Screen
You can set Text Effect on this screen.
If you enable the Text Effect feature, the text strings specified in [Control Number],
[Stored Watermark], [User Account Number], [Date & Time], and [Machine Serial
Number] on the [Watermark] screen are embedded in the background of each copy.
When the copy is copied again, the text embedded in the background is printed as
embossed or outline text depending on the option you select on the [Watermark Effect]
screen.
Note
1
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Select any item.
„Off
Disables the feature, and prints text as it is.
„Embossed
Enables the feature. When the copy is copied again, the text embedded in the
background of the copy is printed as embossed text.
97
3 Copy
„Outline
Enables the feature. When the copy is copied again, the text embedded in the
background of the copy is printed as outline text.
You can also set the character size, density, and other watermark print settings in the System
Administration mode. For information about other advanced settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common
Service Settings" > "Watermark" in the Administrator Guide.
Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded Paper)
This feature allows you to fold copy in half, or crease in half.
Important • Do not remove paper from the finisher tray until all the output copies have been delivered.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• The supported paper orientation is only
Copy
1
2
3
. Select the tray whose orientation is set to
.
Select [Folding].
Select any item.
„No Folding
Does not fold the copies.
„Single Fold
Displayed when the Finisher-B1 with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed.
Creases copies in half.
Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)
This feature allows you to repeatedly copies one original onto equally divided areas
according to the specified number of copies.
Note
1
2
• When anything other than [Auto %] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge], image loss may occur
depending on the image size.
Select [Preset Repeat Image].
Select any item.
„Off
Disables this feature.
„2 Pages Up
Makes two copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper.
„4 Pages Up
Makes four copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper.
„8 Pages Up
Makes eight copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper.
98
Output Format
ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card)
This feature allows you to copy both sides of a small undetectable original, such as an
ID card, onto one side of paper.
1
Place a document against the top
left edge of the document glass,
and close the cover.
Important • Use the document glass when
copying. The document
feeder is not available for this
feature.
• Specify the original’s orientation correctly.
• Place the card slightly away from the top-left corner of the document glass so that the whole
image can be captured.
Copy
2
3
For the document orientations, refer to "Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded
Documents)" (P.81).
Select [ID Card Copying].
Select [On].
3
„Off
Disables ID card copying.
„On
Enables ID card copying.
99
3 Copy
Job Assembly
On the [Job Assembly] screen, you can configure features such as Build Job and
Sample Set. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job) ....................100
Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy) ........................................................102
Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals) ..............................................................................103
Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area).....................104
Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job)...............................................105
On the [All Services] screen, select
[Copy].
2
Select the [Job Assembly] tab, and
then select a feature on the [Job
Assembly] screen.
Copy
1
3
Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as
One Job)
This feature allows you to apply different copy settings to each document page or each
document stack, and then outputs the copies as one job.
1
2
3
Select [Build Job].
Select [On].
Select the desired print settings.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
„Off
Build Job is not applied.
„On
Build Job is applied. The feature buttons appear. Set any item if necessary.
Important • The features set here cannot be canceled or changed while the machine performs a copy
job.
For features available in Build Job, refer to "Features that can be set in Build Job" (P.100).
Features that can be set in Build Job
„Copy Output
For information on the feature, refer to "Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)" (P.82).
„Booklet Creation
For information on the feature, refer to "Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)" (P.84).
100
Job Assembly
„Covers
Important • The machine does not copy on a cover when using the Build Job feature.
For information on the feature, refer to "Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies)" (P.87).
„Annotations
For information on the feature, refer to "Annotations (Adding a Comment / a Date / Page Numbers to
Copies)" (P.91).
„Watermark
For information about the feature, refer to "Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of
Copies)" (P.96).
[Copy Job] screen
Copy
The following describes the screen
that appears while the Build Job is
being executed.
„Chapter Start...
3
Displays the [Build Job - Chapter
Start / Segment Separators]
screen.
Refer to "[Build Job - Chapter Start/Segment Separators] Screen" (P.102).
„Change Settings...
Displays the [Copy] screen allowing you to change the settings. After changing the
settings as necessary, press the <Start> button on the control panel to start scanning
the document.
„Last Original
Select this to end scanning of documents. The build job starts.
„Next Original
Select this when you have another document. This item is selected when using the
Build Job feature.
„Delete
The document data stored by the Build Job feature is cleared and the job is cancelled.
Note
• The same operation is performed if you press the <C (Clear)> or <Clear All> button on the
control panel.
• While scanning the loaded document, [Delete] is displayed. Select [Delete] to pause
scanning. Select [Start] in the touch screen, or press the <Start> button on the control panel
to resume scanning.
„Start
When loading the next document and select [Start], the next documents are scanned.
Note
• The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.
101
3 Copy
[Build Job - Chapter Start/Segment Separators] Screen
This screen allows you to divide copy sets or insert separators.
1
Select any item.
„Off
The next stack of documents is copied after the previous stack.
„Chapter Start
Copy
The next stack of documents is copied from Side 1 of a new sheet of paper.
If [Chapter Start] is not selected and copying of the first loaded document ends on Side
1, copying for the next document will begin on Side 2 of the last page of the first
document. When [Chapter Start] is selected and [Multiple-Up] is marked, even if all
documents are divided for every chapter before all of them are assembled in [MultipleUp] feature, the next stack of document is copied from Side 2 of a paper.
3
„Segment Separators
Separators can be inserted. Select the paper tray to use for the separators from
[Segment Separators Tray].
To insert a separator sheet between the first and second sets, select the [Separator]
button after copying the first set, and then copy the second set.
Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)
When making multiple sets of copies, you can print a sample set to check the finished
output and then print the remaining copy sets. You can select to continue or cancel the
job after the confirmation. The number of sets to be copied can also be changed. The
sample copy is included in the total number of sets.
Note
1
2
• After a sample set is output, the remaining sets will automatically be output if the machine is
left uninstructed for the period specified under [Auto Job Release]. For details on [Auto Job
Release], refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Machine Clock/Timers" > "Auto
Job Release" in the Administrator Guide.
Select [Sample Job].
Select [On].
„Off
No sample set is made.
„On
A sample set is made.
102
Job Assembly
[Copy Job] screen
The machine pauses and displays
the [Copy Job] screen after the
sample set is copied.
„Change Settings...
The [Change Settings...] screen is
displayed. Uncheck the settings
you want to cancel.
„Change Quantity...
The [Change Quantity] screen appears and you can change the number of copies
entered before. Enter a new quantity using the numeric keypad. The new value must
include the number of the sample set that has already been printed. When reducing the
quantity, you cannot enter a number less than the number of copies that have already
been printed.
• If you specify "1" for [Change Quantity] and then press the <Start> button, the machine will
not process the job.
3
„Delete
The remaining copies are cancelled.
„Start
The remaining copies are made.
Note
• The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.
Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals)
Use this feature when you copy a document that has too many pages to be loaded into
the document feeder at one time, or when you scan each document page using the
document glass and have the machine process the pages as one job.
[Next Original] that is usually displayed while scanning documents with the document
feeder is always selected in this mode. In addition, when using the document glass to
scan documents, [Next Original] is also selected during scanning. If [Copy Output] is
set to [Auto], the output is automatically sorted.
When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].
Note
1
2
Copy
Note
• After the first original set is copied, the screen will automatically return to the previous
display if the machine is left unused for the period specified under [Auto Clear]. For details
on [Auto Job Release], refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Machine Clock/
Timers" > "Auto Job Release" in the Administrator Guide.
Select [Combine Original Sets].
Select [On].
„Off
Disables this feature.
„On
Enables this feature.
103
3 Copy
[Copy Job] screen
The [Copy Job] screen is displayed
when copying begins.
„Last Original
Select this to end scanning
documents.
„Next Original
Select this when you have more documents to copy. This button is activated when the
[Combine Original Sets] feature is used.
„Delete
The document data stored by [Combine Original Sets] is cleared and the copying is
cancelled.
Copy
Note
3
„Start
• The same operation is performed if you press the <C> button or <Clear All> button on the
control panel.
Load the next document, and select [Start] to start scanning.
Note
• The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.
Delete Outside/Delete Inside
(Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area)
This feature allows you specify the area to be deleted from a document image. 3 areas
can be specified.
1
Select [Delete Outside/Delete
Inside].
2
Select any item.
„Off
No area is deleted.
„Delete Outside
Deletes the outside of the selected area.
„Delete Inside
Deletes the inside of the selected area.
„Area Settings
Displays the [Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)] screen. You can
set up to 3 areas.
Refer to "[Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)] Screen" (P.105).
„Originals
When the original document is a 2-sided document, specify from which side the
specified area is to be deleted.
z
Both Sides
Applies the settings to both sides of the document.
104
Job Assembly
z
Side 1 Only
Applies the settings to side 1 of the document.
z
Side 2 Only
Applies the settings to side 2 of the document.
[Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)] Screen
Set the area to be deleted. The area is defined by the rectangle formed between the
points X1,Y1 and X2,Y2. The origin point is the top-right corner of a document.
You can specify a value within the range of 0 to 432 mm for the width (X) and the length
(Y) in 1 mm increments.
Note
• Specify the 2 coordinates from the top right corner of the document.
• When specifying multiple areas, the specified areas can overlap each other.
• When [Reduce/Enlarge] is enabled, the specified area will be reduced/enlarged accordingly.
1
Select [Area 1], [Area 2], or [Area
3].
Copy
2
Enter the value for X1 into [X1]
using the numeric keypad, and
select [Save].
3
3
4
5
Enter the value for Y1 into [Y1] using the numeric keypad, and select [Save].
Enter the value for X2 into [X2] using the numeric keypad, and select [Save].
Enter the value for Y2 into [Y2] using the numeric keypad, and select [Save].
Note
• If all of [X1], [Y1], [X2], and [Y2] are set to [0], the area will be invalid. If no other area is
specified, the Delete Outside/Delete Inside feature cannot be used.
• If you select <C> button, the value is cleared.
„Clear Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)
Clears all the values set for Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3).
Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job)
This feature allows you to call a stored program for build job.
For information on this feature, refer to "Calling a Stored Program" (P.243).
105
4 Fax
This chapter describes the basic fax procedures and the fax features provided
by the machine.
z
Fax Procedure ..........................................................................................108
z
Operations during Faxing .........................................................................114
z
About Internet Fax ....................................................................................116
z
About Server Fax......................................................................................123
z
Fax/Internet Fax........................................................................................125
z
General Settings .......................................................................................132
z
Layout Adjustment ....................................................................................135
z
Fax/Internet Fax Options ..........................................................................139
z
More Options ............................................................................................154
z
Broadcast..................................................................................................158
z
Receiving Faxes .......................................................................................167
z
Facsimile Information Services.................................................................169
Note
• The fax features are not available for some models. An optional package is
necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• LINE 2 (Line 2) and LINE 4 (Line 4) are optional.
4 Fax
Fax Procedure
This section describes the basic fax operations. The following shows the fax flow and
reference sections.
Step 1 Loading Documents .......................................................................................................108
Step 2 Selecting Features ..........................................................................................................110
Step 3 Specifying Destinations .................................................................................................111
Step 4 Starting the Fax Job .......................................................................................................112
Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in Job Status ............................................................................113
Step 1 Loading Documents
There are two methods for loading documents:
„Document Feeder (Optional)
Fax
4
z
Single sheet
z
Multiple sheets
„Document Glass
z
Single sheet
z
Bound documents, such as books
Document Feeder
The document feeder supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from
115 x 125 mm to 297 x 600 mm (long) (A3, 11 x 17 inches).
The document feeder automatically detects documents of standard-size widths.
Note
• The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size
Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings,
refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in
the Administrator Guide
The sizes on the left are detected as the sizes shown on the right.
z
8-inch width document
J
B5 width document
z
10-inch width document
J
B4 width document
The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.
Document Type (Weight)
Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2)
Plain paper (50 - 80
g/m2)
Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 g/m2)
Number of
Sheets
75 sheets
75 sheets
50 sheets
Important • Place folded or creased documents on the document glass to avoid paper jams.
• 2-sided scanning of lightweight paper (38 - 48 g/m2) is not supported.
For information on faxing mixed sized documents, "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size
Documents Simultaneously)" (P.136).
108
Fax Procedure
1
Remove any paper clips and
staples before loading the
document.
2
Place the document (the front side
of 2-sided document) face up in the
center of the document feeder.
Note
3
• The indicator lights when the
document is loaded correctly.
If the indicator does not light
up, the machine may be trying
to detect a document on the document glass. Press the <C> button, and then reload the
document.
Adjust the movable document
guides to just touch the edges of
the document loaded.
Fax
4
Document Glass
The document glass supports a single sheet, a book, or other similar documents up to
297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17").
Important • After using the document glass, close the document cover.
The document glass automatically detects standard size documents.
Note
• The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size
Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings,
refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in
the Administrator Guide
CAUTION
Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the document glass. It may
break the glass and cause injuries.
1
Open the document cover.
Important • Ensure that a screen is
displayed on the control
panel, and then load a
document. If a document is
loaded before a screen is
displayed, the machine may
not properly detect the
document size.
2
Place the document face down,
and align it against the top left
corner of the document glass.
109
4 Fax
3
Close the document cover.
Note
• When a standard size document is placed on the document glass, the size of the document
is displayed in the message area.
Step 2 Selecting Features
You can select the Fax or Internet Fax feature, or the Server Fax feature on the [All
Services] screen.
Important • The fax and Internet Fax features are not available while the Server Fax feature is enabled.
Note
• Features displayed may vary depending on the model of your machine.
• When the Authentication or Account Administration feature is used, a user ID and passcode
may be required. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.
1
Press the <All Services> button.
Fax
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
4
<All Services>
button
C
2
Select [Fax/Internet Fax].
3
If the previous settings still remain,
press the <Clear All> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
4
Select each tab, and configure
features as necessary.
When you press the <Energy Saver>
button while configuring the features, you
can select whether to use the feature that
skips 2-sided blank pages. For details,
refer to "2 Sided (Skip Blank Pages)" (P.133).
The following shows the reference section for each tab.
"General Settings" (P.132)
"Layout Adjustment" (P.135)
"Fax/Internet Fax Options" (P.139)
"More Options" (P.154)
110
<Clear All>
button
Fax Procedure
Step 3 Specifying Destinations
Three methods are available to specify recipients: by phone number, by address
number, and by group dial number. The following shows input methods supported by
each method.
Numeric Keypad
One Touch
buttons
Address Book
O
X
X
Phone Number
Address Number
(Speed Dialing)
3 digits (001 to 500)
2 digits + ∗ (nn0 to nn9)
3 digits (001 to 070)
∗∗∗ (All address numbers)
Group Dial Number
# + 2 digits
X
From the list tab and
index
O
O: Available X: Not available
Note
• When the Address Book Extension Kit (optional) is installed, you can specify up to 999
address numbers.
You can specify multiple recipients (Broadcast Send) using the above methods. You
can also use a combination of the methods.
If the same recipient was specified for several pending documents, you can send the
documents with a single phone call. This feature is referred to as Batch Send. Note that
you cannot use Batch Send with Broadcast Send, Relay Broadcast, Remote Mailbox,
and Delay Start when prior to the specified time. When using a redial, resend, or
delayed start send transmission job, or authentication feature, to send to the same
address from different users, then Batch Send is not possible.
Important • Confirm the recipient before sending a fax.
For information on Broadcast Send, "Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients)" (P.158).
This section describes how to enter a phone number with the numeric keypad.
1
Enter a fax number using the
numeric keypad.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
Numeric keypad
C
2
To specify multiple recipients,
select [+Add] on the touch screen.
Note
• If you enter an incorrect value,
press the <C> button and
enter the correct value.
• Depending on the settings, a
screen to re-enter the recipient may be displayed after you specify the recipient and then
select [+Add] on the touch screen. In such case, re-enter the recipient.
• [+Add] is grayed out if Broadcast Send is disabled (when the [Enable Broadcast] check box
is displayed, and it is not checked). For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service
Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Broadcast Checkbox on 1st Tab" in the Administrator Guide.
For information on specifying a fax number using the address book, "Specifying a Destination Using the
Address Book" (P.126).
111
Fax
Important • When using the Server Fax feature, you cannot specify address numbers using the numeric
keypad or use one-touch buttons.
4
4 Fax
For information on specifying a fax number using the speed dialing, "Speed Dialing (Specifying a
Destination Using an Address Number)" (P.127).
For information on specifying a fax number using one touch buttons, "Specifying a Destination using a
One Touch Button" (P.128).
For information on the Internet Fax, "About Internet Fax" (P.116).
Step 4 Starting the Fax Job
The following explains the procedure to start a fax job.
1
Press the <Start> button.
Important • If the document has been set
in the document feeder, do not
hold down the document while
it is being conveyed.
Note
Fax
4
• Depending on the settings,
the screen to re-enter the
recipient may be displayed
after pressing the <Start>
button. In this case, re-enter
the recipient.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Start> button
C
• If a problem occurs, an error message appears in the touch screen. Solve the problem in
accordance with the message.
• You can set the next job during faxing.
„If you have more documents
2
If you have more documents to fax, select [Next Original] on the touch screen while the
current document is being scanned. This allows you to send the documents as one set
of data.
While documents are being
scanned, select [Next Original].
Note
• When using the document
feeder, load the next
document after the machine
has finished scanning the first
document.
• When the above screen is displayed and no operation is performed for a certain period of
time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents.
112
• You can change the scan settings of the next document by selecting [Resolution], [Scan
Size] and [Lighten/Darken] displayed after selecting [Next Original].
3
Load the next document.
4
Press the <Start> button.
If you have more documents, repeat Steps 3 and 4.
Fax Procedure
5
When all documents have been
scanned, select [Last Original].
Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in Job Status
The following explains the procedure to confirm the status of the faxed job.
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Job Status>
button
C
Fax
2
Confirm the job status.
4
From the pull-down menu, you can
select and display the job types ([All
Jobs], [Printer & Print from M’box],
[Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax], [Job
flow, auto file transfer]).
Note
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
„If undelivered documents exist
You can confirm undelivered documents in the [Job Status] screen or [Job Status/
Activity Report] screen.
For information on how to send or delete undelivered documents, refer to "Undelivered Faxes" (P.257).
113
4 Fax
Operations during Faxing
The following describes the available operations during faxing. The following shows the
reference section for each feature.
Stopping the Fax Job.................................................................................................................114
Changing the Scan Settings.......................................................................................................115
Stopping the Fax Job
To cancel scanning a fax document, follow the procedure below.
1
Press either [Delete] on the touch
screen or the <Stop> button on the
control panel.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
Fax
1
<Stop> button
C
4
2
Select [Delete].
„If the screen shown in step 1 does not appear:
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
2
114
Select the job to cancel, and then
select [Delete].
<Job Status>
button
Operations during Faxing
Changing the Scan Settings
You can change the scan settings while scanning the document.
1
Select [Next Original].
2
Select [Change Settings...]
3
Set [Resolution], [Scan Size], and
[Lighten/Darken].
Fax
4
For each setting, refer to "Resolution (Specifying the Scanning Resolution)" (P.134), "Original Size
(Specifying the Scan Size for the Original)" (P.135), or "Lighten/Darken (Adjusting Fax Density)"
(P.132).
Press the <Start> button.
4
115
4 Fax
About Internet Fax
Unlike general fax communications using public phone lines, Internet Fax uses
corporate intranets and the Internet to send or receive scan documents as e-mail
attachments.
Because Internet Fax uses existing corporate intranets and the Internet, the
transmission is less expensive than general fax transmission. By using a fax gateway,
the machine can also communicate with fax machines that do not support the Internet
Fax feature.
Important • The Internet Fax feature is not available while the Server Fax feature is enabled.
Note
• This feature is not available for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is
necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
For information on how to connect the machine to a network and configure the network environment,
refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" > in the Administrator Guide, and the manual
contained in the CD-ROM on the Driver CD Kit.
Fax
4
Internet Fax Overview
The following describes the Internet Fax features of the machine.
Sending Internet Fax
The Internet Fax feature allows you to send documents scanned by the machine as
TIFF-format attachments to Internet Fax-compatible machines.
Important • The TIFF file profiles that can be processed differ depending on the Internet Fax-compatible
machine of the recipient. Confirm the profile that can be processed by the recipient's Internet
Fax-compatible machine before specifying a profile. For more information, refer to "Sending
Internet Fax" (P.118). For profiles, refer to "Internet Fax Profile (Specifying Internet Fax
Profiles)" (P.151).
• If a document is sent to a computer using the Internet Fax feature, it cannot be opened in
some cases. When you send a document to a computer, therefore, using the Scan-to-E-mail
feature is recommended.
„Using Direct Internet Fax feature
An Internet Fax can be sent directly to the Internet Fax-compatible machines without
going through the SMTP server.
You can switch between Internet Fax and Direct Internet Fax in the System Administration mode. For
more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Internet Fax Control" > "Internet Fax
Path" in the Administrator Guide.
„Registering e-mail addresses in address numbers
Once you register a recipient's e-mail address in an address number, you do not need
to enter the e-mail address each time you send Internet Fax to the recipient.
Note
• To address numbers, you can also register the Internet Fax profile and other settings
required for transmission.
For information on how to register e-mail addresses, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add
Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
„Using the Broadcast Send feature
An Internet Fax can be sent to multiple destinations by specifying multiple e-mail
addresses. Also, you can mix normal fax recipients and Internet Fax recipients to send
a broadcast transmission for fax and Internet Fax.
For information on how to specify recipients, "Step 3 Specifying Destinations" (P.111) and "Specifying
a Destination Using the Address Book" (P.126).
116
About Internet Fax
„Forwarding documents stored in mailboxes
By enabling the forwarding feature and registering a forwarding e-mail address for a
mailbox beforehand, the fax documents stored in the mailbox are automatically
forwarded to the specified computer. The user, therefore, does not need to walk up to
the machine to pick up the fax documents.
For more information, "Forwarding Documents Stored in a Mailbox" (P.121).
„Sending an Internet Fax to normal fax machines via a relay station
By specifying mail addresses in a specific format, you can send faxes from the machine
on the network via an Internet Fax-compatible machine (fax gateway) to fax machines
that do not support the Internet Fax feature.
Important • This feature is available only when the e-mail reception method on the fax gateway is set to
SMTP.
For more information, "Sending an Internet Fax to normal fax machines via a relay station" (P.120).
Precautions when sending Internet Fax
Note
• You can receive a transmission result e-mail if you set Read Receipts (MDN)/Delivery
Receipts (DSN) when transmitting. For more information, "Acknowledgement Report
(Confirming Transmission Results)" (P.139).
Receiving Internet Fax (Printing Internet Fax)
The machine automatically prints Internet Fax documents that are sent by e-mail from
an Internet Fax-compatible machine.
Note
• The following TIFF file format and profiles are available for e-mail reception.
File format: TIFF-FX (RFC2301) Profile: TIFF-S, TIFF-F, TIFF-J, and TIFF-C. If an
unsupported profile is received, the machine may not be able to print the file. For more
information, "Receiving Internet Fax" (P.119).
Restrictions on the E-mail Server
Depending on the system environment, such as restrictions on the e-mail server, largesize e-mails cannot be sent or received. Before you set the data-split feature, therefore,
check the system environments of the sending and receiving ends.
If data is split into multiple data but each data size is still too large, change the image
quality or resolution of each data to make its size even smaller.
117
Fax
The message "Doc. Sent" displayed on the [Job Status] screen of the machine, [Job
History Report], and the [Transmission Report] indicates that the transmission to the
SMTP server configured on the machine has been successful. The Internet Fax
transmission to the recipient may not complete if there is a problem on the Internet. In
such case, the machine will not be notified of such transmission error. After sending an
important e-mail, we suggest you to confirm it is received, such as by calling the
recipient.
4
4 Fax
Features Unavailable for Sending Internet Fax
The following features are available for regular fax transmission, but are not available
for Internet Fax transmission.
Screen
Features
Fax/Internet Fax Options
Starting Rate
Priority Send
Delay Start
Cover Page
Recipient Print Sets
F Code
Remote Mailbox
More Options
If you are using the fax gateway feature, you can set the communication mode and F code. For more
information on the fax gateway feature, "Sending an Internet Fax to normal fax machines via a relay
station" (P.120).
Fax
4
Remote Polling
Sending Internet Fax
The following explains the procedure to send Internet Fax.
Important • The CC, BCC, and Reply To features are not available for Internet Fax.
Note
• The machine converts documents to the TIFF format and then sends them as e-mail
attachments.
1
Display the [Fax/Internet Fax]
screen, and select [iFax] from the
pull-down menu.
2
3
Select [New Recipients].
Specify a recipient by entering up
to 128 characters with the
keyboard displayed in the touch
screen.
Important • If you specify a fax number, the data will not be sent.
Note
4
• You can use address numbers, one touch buttons, group dial numbers, or Address Book to
specify e-mail addresses. For more information, "Speed Dialing (Specifying a Destination
Using an Address Number)" (P.127), "Specifying a Destination using a One Touch Button"
(P.128), and "Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book" (P.126).
Enter a subject and a message if necessary.
For entering the subject, "Internet Fax Subject (Specifying the Internet Fax Subject)" (P.145). For
entering the contents, "Message (Mail Contents) (Editing the Internet Fax Mail Contents)" (P.146).
Note
• If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during scanning of a document, a screen
appears to prompt you to select whether to send the job up to the stored pages or to cancel
the job. Choose one of the processes.
• If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during Internet Fax transmission, the
transmission is cancelled and the document data is deleted.
• If TIFF-J is specified for the profile, the recipient's computer may not be able to display the
attached TIFF file properly. In this case, specify the TIFF-S or TIFF-F profile.
118
About Internet Fax
• If the destination machine is not the same model as this machine, it may not print data
received from this machine. Check if the destination machine supports the Internet Fax
feature before you send data to it.
Receiving Internet Fax
„Reception method
When the machine receives e-mail from an Internet Fax-compatible machine, the
received document is printed automatically. No specific operations are needed to
receive e-mail.
The machine also accepts e-mails addressed to mailboxes on the machine, such as
"BOX123@myhost.example.com".
For information on the mailbox, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Create Mailbox" > in the
Administrator Guide. For the job flow sheets, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Create Job
Flow Sheet" in the Administrator Guide.
• If domains for receiving e-mail are restricted by CentreWare Internet Services, you will only
receive Internet Fax from the permitted domains. For information about the domain filter,
refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings" >
"Domain Filtering" in the Administrator Guide.
Fax
Note
• You can confirm the domain setting status in the [Domain Filter List]. For more information,
refer to "4 Machine Status" > "Machine Information" > "Print Reports" in the Administrator
Guide.
4
„Printing size
Internet Fax documents received on the machine are printed at the same size as the
original documents of the senders.
Note
• When [TIFF-S] is selected for the profile, the printing size will be A4.
When the loaded paper is not the same size as the sent document or when the paper
tray used for printing received documents is restricted, the receiving process will be the
same as that for regular faxes.
„Receiving e-mail
Each e-mail header and attachment (TIFF file) of received e-mail will be printed.
z
Split documents sent by e-mail
If a document scanned by the machine is split into segments according to the [Max.
No. of Pages for Split Send] setting made with CentreWare Internet Services, each
segment will be treated as individual e-mail and attached with the details of split data.
z
Attachments (TIFF format)
If an unsupported attachment file is received, the file is deleted. You can confirm the
error in the Job History Report.
z
When the mailbox number is not registered
If the specified mailbox is not registered, the received data is deleted. You can
confirm the cause of the problem in the Job History Report.
z
Mailbox operations
If the machine runs out of hard disk space while printing e-mail or storing e-mail to
the mailbox, the page being processed will be deleted at the point in time when the
machine runs out of hard disk space.
119
4 Fax
„Restricting incoming e-mail
The machine can be configured to accept or reject e-mails received from specified
domains. This feature is known as the "Domain Filter". You can register up to 50
domains as permitted or rejected domains.
When receiving an e-mail, the machine checks the Domain Filter settings. If the domain
is registered as the domain to be rejected, the machine will not receive the e-mail. You
can confirm the result in the [Job History Report]. The job history of any rejected mail
is not stored.
For information about the domain filter, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" >
"Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings" > "Domain Filtering" in the Administrator Guide.
Useful Features
Using an E-mail Address to Send Internet Fax to a Mailbox
By specifying the e-mail address of a mailbox on this machine, you can send Internet
Fax from an Internet Fax-compatible machine to the mailbox.
Fax
When Internet Fax data is received, the machine stores it in the target mailbox and
prints a Mailbox Report.
4
This feature is available only if the recipient’s machine can receive e-mail via SMTP.To use this feature,
the recipient’s machine must have a mailbox that does not have a passcode. For more information, refer
to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Domain Filtering" in the Administrator Guide.
1
Display the [Fax/Internet Fax]
screen, and select [iFax] from the
pull-down menu.
2
3
Select any item.
Enter the e-mail address of the
target mailbox in the following format.
BOX123@myhost.example.com
BOX (fixed characters to indicate
mailbox) + mailbox number
Example
@ + host name of the
receiving machine
Domain name of the receiving
machine
Mailbox number............................................ 123
(Enter the digits of the mailbox number to
match those of the recipient)
Host name of the receiving machine............ myhost
Domain name of the receiving machine....... example.com
Important • If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during Internet Fax transmission, the
transmission is cancelled and the document data is deleted.
Note
• If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during scanning of a document, a screen
appears to prompt you to select whether to send the job up to the stored pages or to cancel
the job. Choose one of the processes.
Sending an Internet Fax to normal fax machines via a relay station
By specifying e-mail addresses in a specific format, you can send a document to
regular fax machines (that do not support the Internet Fax feature) via a network.
With this feature, the machine first sends a document to an Internet Fax-compatible
machine (fax gateway) by e-mail via the Internet. The e-mail document is then
converted to a fax document on the Internet Fax-compatible machine, and is forwarded
120
About Internet Fax
to its destinations. The fax transmission costs can be reduced by locating the fax
gateway and fax machines within an area where the same local rate applies.
Important • This feature is available only when the e-mail reception method on the fax gateway is set to
SMTP.
Note
• The e-mail received by the fax gateway is deleted even if the fax was not correctly sent.
• The setting configured in [Starting Rate] of the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen is used as
the communication mode from the fax gateway to the destination fax machine.
• Fax forwarding can be restricted by setting [Fax Transfer from Address Book] and [Fax
Transfer Maximum Data Size] in the Tools.
1
Display the [Fax/Internet Fax]
screen, and select [iFax] from the
pull-down menu.
2
3
Select any item.
Enter the e-mail address of the
target mailbox in the following format.
FAX=
(fixed characters)
Example
Fax number of
the recipient
/T33S= (fixed
characters) and F
code (if necessary)
@ + host name of
the machine that
converts and sends
the received e-mail
as a fax.
Fax
FAX= 0312345678 /T33S=123 @myhost. example.com
Domain
name
Fax number .................................................. 0312345678
F code (if necessary).................................... /T33S=123
Host name of the receiving machine ............ myhost
Domain name of the receiving machine ....... example.com
Important • If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during Internet Fax transmission, the
transmission is cancelled and the document data is deleted.
Note
• If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during scanning of a document, a screen
appears to prompt you to select whether to send the job up to the stored pages or to cancel
the job. Choose one of the processes.
Forwarding Documents Stored in a Mailbox
The following describes the feature to automatically forward fax documents stored in a
mailbox, as e-mail attachment.
Fax documents sent to mailboxes using the fax signal method (proprietary
communication procedures), F Code method or DTMF method, and fax documents
stored in mailboxes by the Box Selector feature can be forwarded as e-mail
attachments.
Important • This feature can only be used when the mail receiving protocol is SMTP.
For information on the mailbox forwarding settings, sending to mailboxes, using the Box Selector to
receive documents in a mailbox, and printing or deleting documents received in a mailbox, refer to
"Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox" (P.221).
For how to set the Mailbox Selector feature, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Received
Options" in the Administrator Guide.
121
4
4 Fax
„Forwarding Internet Fax
The machine can automatically forward fax documents received in a mailbox or fax
documents stored in a mailbox by using the Box Selector feature to the forwarding
address specified for the mailbox as e-mail.
With this forwarding feature, you can receive Internet Fax documents on your computer
without having to walk up to the machine to pick them up. You can also save paper by
displaying the documents on your computer screen.
„How to forward Internet Fax
The following operations are required for using the forwarding feature of Internet Fax.
z
On the machine sending a fax
Sending faxes to the mailbox using the fax signal method (proprietary
communication procedure), F Code method or DTMF method.
For information on the transmission method, refer to "More Options" (P.154).
z
On the machine receiving the fax in a mailbox and forwarding an Internet Fax
Fax
Creating a job flow sheet to specify a forwarding address and then making a link
between the job flow sheet and the mailbox.
For information on registering a job flow, refer to "Job Flow Sheets" (P.231).
4
Important • Do not set the address of the machine as the forwarding address.
Note
• You can register up to 100 locations.
• [Mailbox Number] and [Passcode] are required by the sender. Inform the sender of the
settings.
• If the fax you received is a JBIG-compressed image, and if the Internet Fax profile of the
forwarding destination is set to TIFF-F, the image is converted into MH format when
forwarding. Also, if the Internet Fax profile is TIFF-S, the fax image is forwarded as is without
changing the size and resolution settings.
• If the hard disk in the machine becomes full while receiving an Internet Fax, the reception is
cancelled and the partly received file is deleted.
• If there is a problem with the data during Internet Fax forwarding, the forwarding is cancelled
and the received document is saved to the mailbox.
• If forwarding using SMTP fails, the received document is stored in the mailbox.
• You can confirm the forwarding result in the [Job History Report].
122
About Server Fax
About Server Fax
If your machine supports the scan feature, installing the Server Fax Kit (optional) allows
you to use the Fax feature of a Server Fax server.
When your machine does not support the Fax feature and supports the Server Fax
feature only, the Server Fax feature will be enabled automatically.
When your machine supports both the Fax and Server Fax features, manually switch
to the Server Fax feature in Tools of the System Administration mode.
With this Server Fax feature, you can transfer image data received by the machine to
the Server Fax server and can transfer image data received by the Server Fax server
to the machine via a network based on the settings you made.
The Server Fax feature supports the SMB, FTP, and SMTP protocols.
For information on how to connect the machine to a network and set the network environment, refer to
the Administrator Guide and the manual on the Driver CD Kit CD-ROM.
Note
• The Server Fax service cannot be used together with the Fax service or the Internet Fax
service.
• This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Sending Server Fax
1
Select [Fax] on the [All Services]
screen.
2
Use the keyboard to directly enter a
destination, or use Address Book
to specify a destination.
For information on how to use the keyboard, refer to "Specifying a Destination using the Keyboard
Screen" (P.128).
For information on how to use Address Book, refer to "Specifying a Destination Using the Address
Book" (P.126).
Important • When the Server Fax feature is used for fax transmission, the attributes other than [Fax
Number], [Recipient Name], and [Index] are ignored in Address Book.
123
Fax
Important • While the Server Fax feature is enabled, the Fax feature is detected as "not installed" even if
a Fax Kit is installed on the machine. During that time, therefore, fax transmission and
reception are disabled and printed reports show that the machine does not support the Fax
feature.
4
4 Fax
Features Unavailable for Sending Server Fax
The following features are available for regular faxes, but are not available for server
faxes.
Screen
Features
General Settings
Resolution*
Fax/Internet Fax Options
Priority Send
Cover Page
Recipient Print Sets
Remote Mailbox
F Code
More Options
Remote Polling
Store for Polling
On-hook
Fax
* When the SMB or FTP protocol is used, the available options are [Standard] and [Fine], and the
resolution of data that is sent to a final destination depends on the resolution setting on the fax server.
When the SMTP protocol is used, the available option is [Fine] only.
4
The following settings of the Server Fax feature use the values specified under Tools
> System Settings > Scan Service Settings > Scan Defaults.
z
Background Suppression
z
Lighten/Darken
z
Sharpness
Features Available for Sending Server Fax (When SMTP is Used)
When the SMTP protocol is used, the Server Fax feature is compliant with the E-mail
settings configured under Tools. The following E-mail settings, however, are not
available for the Server Fax feature: [Read Receipts] and [Reply To].
124
Fax/Internet Fax
Fax/Internet Fax
You can specify recipients in [Fax/Internet Fax]. The following shows the reference
section for each feature.
Internet Fax/Fax (Selecting Internet Fax/Fax) ......................................................................... 125
+Add (Sending Faxes to Multiple Recipients)......................................................................... 125
Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book .................................................................. 126
Speed Dialing (Specifying a Destination Using an Address Number) .................................... 127
Specifying a Destination using a One Touch Button ............................................................... 128
Specifying a Destination using the Keyboard Screen .............................................................. 128
Specifying a Destination using the Redial Feature .................................................................. 129
Entering Specific Symbols ....................................................................................................... 130
Removing/Confirming a Recipient .......................................................................................... 130
Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the [All
Services] screen.
2
Select a feature on the [Fax/
Internet Fax] screen.
Fax
1
4
Internet Fax/Fax (Selecting Internet Fax/Fax)
You can switch between Internet Fax and Fax as necessary.
Note
1
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Select [Fax] or [Internet Fax] from
the pull-down menu.
+Add (Sending Faxes to Multiple Recipients)
The Broadcast Send feature allows you to transmit the same document to multiple
recipients with a single operation. There is no need to repeat the same operation for
each recipient.
If you specify Broadcast Send, the machine prints a relay broadcast report/multi-poll
report after the Broadcast Send operation finishes.
Note
• For Fax and Internet Fax, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one
time is as follows:
Using the numeric keypad only: 200 locations; using address numbers only: 500 locations;
and using both the numeric keypad and address numbers: 699 locations.
For Server Fax, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is 50.
• When the Address Book Extension Kit (optional) is installed, the maximum number of
recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows:
Using address numbers only: 999 locations; and using both the numeric keypad and
address numbers: 1198 locations.
For Server Fax, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is 50.
• The one touch buttons correspond to address numbers 001 - 070.
125
4 Fax
• When using Broadcast Send, [Cover Page] and [Remote Mailbox] are invalid even if they
are selected on the control panel. If you want to use [Cover Page] and [Remote Mailbox], set
them when registering each recipient in address numbers.
• You cannot specify [Acknowledgement Report].
„Show Fax No. / E-mail
When you check the [Show Fax No. / E-mail] check box, the recipient’s name will not
be displayed in the recipient field.
„Enable Broadcast
To prevent missending a fax to multiple recipients, you can set whether to use
Broadcast Send prior to specifying multiple recipients. Check the [Enable Broadcast]
check box to specify multiple recipients.
[Enable Broadcast] is displayed when [On] is set for [Broadcast Checkbox on 1st Tab]. For more
information on the setting, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Broadcast
Checkbox on 1st Tab" in the Administrator Guide.
Fax
1
2
Select the first recipient.
Select [+Add].
Note
4
3
4
5
6
• Depending on the settings,
the screen to re-enter the
recipient may be displayed
after specifying the recipient
and then selecting [+Add] on the touch screen. In that case, re-enter the recipient.
As some settings prohibit Broadcast Send, [+Add] may not be available (grayed out) depending on the
settings. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Re-enter
Broadcast Recipients" in the Administrator Guide.
Select the next recipient.
Repeat Step 2 and Step 3.
Press the <Start> button.
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to start transmission.
Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book
This section describes how to use the address book to specify recipients.
The address book shows the fax numbers registered to the address numbers.
For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add
Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
Important • When the Server Fax feature is used for fax transmission, the attributes other than [Fax
Number], [Recipient Name], and [Index] are ignored in Address Book.
1
2
Select [Address Book].
3
Select recipients from the displayed list. A check mark is then added to the check box
of each recipient you selected.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to specify all the required recipients.
On the lower-part of the screen,
select the button that has the
character or number you want to
search for.
Note
126
• To deselect a recipient, select the recipient again or press the <C> button.
Fax/Internet Fax
• Any recipient that has 50 or more characters cannot be specified for the Server Fax feature.
Using the Address Book
Use address numbers, and [Addresses], [Group], and index buttons to search for fax numbers.
In the System Administration mode, you can set what address number to display at the top of the address
book. For information on how to change the default value, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" >
"Screen Defaults" > "Address Book Speed Dial Default" in the Administrator Guide.
„Addresses
Displays a list of all registered addresses.
Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. Select
[Go to] and enter a 3-digit address number (001 to 500) using the numeric keypad to
display the specified number at the top of the list.
„Index buttons
„Group
4
Select this item to display pre-registered group dial numbers.
You can select one or more group dial numbers on the screen.
Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.
Important • [Group] is unavailable for the Server Fax feature.
For information on how to register group dial numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" >
"Create Fax Group Recipients" in the Administrator Guide.
„Details
Displays the [Details] screen. This screen displays the address number details such as
a recipient name, fax number, and Internet Fax address. To check the fax number and
Internet Fax address, select [Fax Number In Full] and [E-mail Address In Full]
respectively.
Speed Dialing (Specifying a Destination Using an Address Number)
You can use address numbers to specify recipients. Register the address numbers for
speed dialing beforehand.
You can use a wildcard ("∗" character on the numeric keypad or [∗] on the keyboard
screen) to specify multiple recipients.
z
Enter the first two digits to specify address numbers
For example, enter "10∗" to specify 10 numbers from 100 to 109.
z
Specify all the address numbers
Enter "∗∗∗" to specify all the address numbers.
When you specify address numbers, confirm that the corresponding fax numbers registered in the
machine are correct. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup &
Calibration" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
Note
Fax
Allows you to search for recipients by indexes that are specified when address
numbers are registered.
Select the [A-C], [DEF], [GHI], [JKL], [M-O], [P-R], [S-U], [V-X], [YZ], or [0-9] button, and
then select the required character or number on the screen.
• You cannot specify two wildcard characters such as 1∗∗, ∗1∗, or ∗∗1.
• The maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows:
Dialing with address numbers: 500 locations. Using the numeric keypad in combination with
address numbers: 699 locations.
127
4 Fax
• When Address Book Extension Kit is installed, the maximum number of recipients that you
can specify at one time is as follows:
Dialing with address number: 999 locations. Using the numeric keypad in combination with
address numbers: 1198 locations.
1
Press the [Speed Dial] button and
enter a 3-digit address number,
Repeat this procedure for each
additional recipient.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Speed Dial>
button
C
Specifying a Destination using a One Touch Button
Fax
You can use the one touch buttons to specify recipients. One touch buttons correspond
to the address numbers from 001 to 070. For example, when the number you want to
dial is registered to the address number 001, press one touch button 001.
For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add
Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
4
1
Press a one touch button. Confirm
that the recipient (fax number)
specified with the one touch button
is displayed on the touch screen.
001
002
003
016
017
018
004
005
006
019
020
021
007
008
009
022
023
024
Important • When pressing a one touch
010
011
012
025
026
027
button, turn over the one
touch button panels
013
014
015
028
029
030
completely, and take off your
hand from the panels. If you
press a button as you turn
over the panels, address numbers may not be specified correctly.
• Do not place any objects near the one touch buttons, nor spill any liquid over them.
Note
• To specify multiple recipients, press the one touch buttons continuously.
• Turn the one touch button panel over to press the one touch buttons 031 and above.
Specifying a Destination using the Keyboard Screen
You can specify recipients using the keyboard screen.When the Additional G3 Port Kit
(optional) is installed, you can set the line (port) and send faxes. Local terminal
information can be registered to each line. You can use each line for a different
purpose.
Important • When transmission to a certain recipient is being prohibited in the System Administration
mode, the [New Recipients] buttons cannot be used.
For details on local terminal Information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Local Terminal
Information" in the Administrator Guide.
1
2
Select [New Recipients].
Specify a recipient with no more
than 128 characters using the
keyboard that appears on the touch
screen.
Note
128
•When the Server Fax feature is used, a destination must be less than 50 characters long. The
available characters are as follows:
Fax/Internet Fax
0 to 9
Numeric characters
-
Pause
#
A starting character for a group number
\
A delimiter for private data. Using this character before and after private data
hides the destination string.
S
A character for password verification
:
DTMF signal
=
A character to wait for dial tones
+
Available, but ignored
(Space)
Available, but ignored
For more Information, refer to the documentation provided with Server Fax Kit.
3
Press the <Start> button.
Note
• When the Additional G3 Port Kit (optional) is installed to LINE 2, line 2 J "2".
• When the Additional G3 Port Kit (optional) is installed to LINE 4, line 4 J "4".
• You can specify line 2 and line 4 when an option is installed.
Fax
Specifying a Destination using the Redial Feature
You can specify recipients using the Redial feature.
1
2
Select [Redial List].
3
Press the <Start> button.
4
Select items you want to specify for
a recipient, and select [Close].
129
4 Fax
Entering Specific Symbols
When specifying a recipient, you can use the following features to enter specific
symbols from the touch screen.
Feature
Fax
4
Button
Function
Input method
Enter pause
- or
<Pause> (-)
One pause is 3 seconds.
You can enter pauses of
6 seconds, 9 seconds,
etc. by additional button
presses.
Press the <Pause>
button.
(Example)
0-123 ...
0--123 ...
Transmit using a
password
S
When a password has
been set, transmission
will only start if the
password matches the
ID number on the remote
terminal.
1. Select [New
Recipients] in the
[Fax/Internet Fax]
screen to display the
keyboard.
2. Select [S].
(Example)
0312345678S12345678
Transmit DTMF
signal
!
Use to transmit the
DTMF signal.
1. Select [New
Recipients] in the
[Fax/Internet Fax]
screen to display the
keyboard.
2. Select [More
Characters].
3. Select [!].
(Example)
0311123456!123#
Transmit PB
(from dial pulse
to tone)
:
Switches the dial type
from pulse to tone when
the Fax service is used.
1. Select [Tone (:)] on
the keyboard screen.
Note
• When using the DTMF method, use specific symbols. For information on the DTMF method,
"Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox)" (P.147), and "Broadcast" (P.158).
Removing/Confirming a Recipient
You can remove or confirm recipients using the pop-up menu.
1
Select the recipient to be removed
or confirmed from [Address/
Recipient].
2
Select any item from the pop-up
menu.
„Remove
Removes the recipient.
„Details...
The [Details] screen is displayed. You can confirm recipients or address numbers.
„Close Menu
Hides the pop-up menu.
130
Fax/Internet Fax
[Details] Screen
Allows you to confirm recipients
„Starting Rate
Allows you to select a communication mode according to the features of a recipient.
Fax
4
131
4 Fax
General Settings
You can set the basic features on the [General Settings] screen. The following shows
the reference section for each feature.
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting Fax Density) .................................................................................132
2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals)..................................................................132
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).........................................................................133
Resolution (Specifying the Scanning Resolution) ....................................................................134
1
Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the [All
Services] screen.
2
Select the [General Settings] tab,
and then select a feature on the
[General Settings] screen.
Fax
Lighten/Darken (Adjusting Fax Density)
You can adjust fax density from seven levels.
4
1
Use [ ] and [
level.
] to select a density
2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals)
This feature enables you to scan and then transmit both sides of a document
automatically.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• The image on the back side of a document is rotated so that it is placed in the same
orientation as the image on the front side.
1
Select a scan option.
„1 Sided
Select this option to scan one side of the document.
„2 Sided (H to H)
Select this option to scan both sides of the document (Head to Head).
„2 Sided (H to T)
Select this option to scan both sides of the document (Head to Toe).
„2 Sided - Skip Blank
Select this option to scan only the document pages that are not blank. You can send
documents without concerning for which side is the front.
132
General Settings
Note
• When [2 Sided - Skip Blank] is selected, the settings change as follows:
- [Original Type]: [Text]
- [Lighten / Darken]: [Normal]
- [Reduce/Enlarge]: [100%]
• You can switch to [Skip Blank Pages] by pressing the <Energy Saver> button while fax
features are being set.
„More...
The [2 Sided Scanning] screen is displayed.
"[2 Sided Scanning] Screen" (P.133).
[2 Sided Scanning] Screen
1
Select whether the document is
one-sided or two-sided. If [2 Sided]
is selected, also select the
orientation of the document.
Fax
„1 Sided
Select this option to scan one side of the document.
4
„2 Sided
Select this option to scan both sides of the document.
„2 Sided (First Page 1 Sided)
Select this option to scan the front side of the first page and both sides of the remaining
pages. Use this item when the back side of the first page is blank.
„2 Sided (Skip Blank Pages)
Select this option to scan only the document pages that are not blank. You can send
documents without concerning for which side is the front.
Note
• When [2 Sided - Skip Blank] is selected, the settings change as follows:
[Original Type] : [Text]
[Lighten / Darken] : [Normal]
[Reduce/Enlarge] : [100%]
• You can switch [Skip Blank Pages] by pressing the <Energy Saver> button while fax
features are being set.
„Originals
Select [Head to Head] when both sides of the documents are in the same orientation.
Select [Head to Toe] when the front and back sides of the documents are in opposite
orientations.
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)
This feature allows you to select the type of the original document, such as text and
photo documents.
133
4 Fax
1
Select the original type.
„Text
Select this item when transmitting a document that contains only text.
„Photo & Text
Select this item when transmitting a document that contains both text and photos. The
machine automatically distinguishes the text and photo areas and sets the appropriate
image quality for each area of the document.
„Photo
Select this item when transmitting documents that contain only photos.
Note
• If reduced in size, the scan documents may have stripes in their photo areas.
Fax
Resolution (Specifying the Scanning Resolution)
You can set the resolution for the documents to be scanned.
4
Note
• The machine scans a document at the specified resolution, but if the machine of the
recipient does not support the resolution, the machine automatically changes the resolution
to one supported by the recipient's machine and there is a corresponding loss in quality.
• The higher the resolution, the lower the transmission speed. Usually, we recommend using
[Superfine (400dpi)] or lower.
• Only [Fine] is available for the Server Fax feature.
The resolution can be set individually for each address number. For information on how to register
address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the
Administrator Guide.
1
Select the resolution.
„Standard
Select this item when transmitting standard documents.
(Approx. 200 x 100 pels/25.4 mm)
„Fine (200dpi)
Select this item when transmitting documents with small text or detailed images.
(Approx. 200 x 200 pels/25.4 mm)
„Superfine (400dpi)
Select this item when transmitting documents with fine images.
(400 x 400 pels/25.4 mm)
„Superfine (600dpi)
Select this item when transmitting documents with extremely fine images.
(600 x 600 pels/25.4 mm)
134
Layout Adjustment
Layout Adjustment
On the [Layout Adjustment] screen, you can configure features for scanning
documents. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals)................................................................. 135
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Original) ....................................................... 135
Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ...................... 136
Book Faxing (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .................................................. 136
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scan Ratio) .............................................................................. 137
Stamp (Adding a Stamp when Scanning a Document) ............................................................ 138
1
Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the [All
Services] screen.
2
Select the [Layout Adjustment] tab,
and then select a feature on the
[Layout Adjustment] screen.
Fax
2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals)
4
This feature is the same as [2 Sided Scanning] on the [General Settings] tab. For information on
[General Settings], refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals)" (P.132).
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Original)
This feature allows you to set the scan size for fax transmission.
The machine scans the document at the size you specify, regardless of the original
size. You can add margins, or delete unwanted margins using this feature.
The default values for buttons other than the [Auto Detect] button can be changed in the System
Administration mode. For information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax
Service Settings" > "Original Size Defaults" in the Administrator Guide.
1
Select [Original Size] on the
[Layout Adjustment] screen.
2
Select the desired scan size.
„Auto Detect
Detects the document size automatically.
Document Feeder
Auto-detectable
Document size
Note
B5 , B4, A5 , A4, A4 ,
A3, 8.5 x 11 inches
Document Glass
B6, B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5,
A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11
inches
• When a document size cannot be detected automatically, a message appears prompting
you to enter the document size.
Sizes that can be detected automatically vary depending on the settings made on "Paper Size Settings" in
the System Administration mode. For information on the document sizes that can be automatically
detected, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in
the Administrator Guide.
135
4 Fax
„Standard Size
Select the original size from preset sizes.
You can change the default options. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" >
"Original Size Defaults" in the Administrator Guide.
Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents
Simultaneously)
When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously send different size
documents with the sizes matching the respective sizes of the documents. You can
also specify the size of the paper so that faxes are sent at the same paper size.
Note
• Always load the A5-size documents in portrait orientation.
• When loading B5 documents together with A3 documents loaded in landscape orientation or
A4 documents loaded in portrait orientation, load B5 the documents in portrait orientation.
• Originals may not be scanned correctly if the top-left corners are not aligned properly.
Fax
• The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5
portrait and B4 landscape. If the combination of the document sizes is not our
recommendation, the documents can be fed at an angle and may not be scanned properly.
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
4
• Be sure to set [Original Size] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen to [Auto Detect], when using
mixed sized documents.
1
Select [Original Size] on the
[Layout Adjustment] screen.
2
Confirm that [Auto Detect] is
selected and select [Save]. If [Auto
Detect] is not set, select [Auto
Detect], and then select [Save].
3
4
Select [Mixed Sized Originals].
Select [On].
„Off
Select this item when all documents are of the same size.
„On
When scanning documents of different sizes, the machine automatically detects the
size of each document.
Book Faxing (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)
You can scan the left and right pages of a bound document separately to fax them.
This feature is useful if you need to make separate scans for facing pages of bound
originals such as a booklet.
Note
• The document feeder does not support this feature.
• A non-standard sized document may not be properly divided into two separate pages.
136
Layout Adjustment
1
2
Select [Book Faxing].
Select any item.
„Off
Does not scan as a bound
document.
„Left Page then Right
Scans the left page and then the right page of facing pages.
„Right Page then Left
Scans the right page and then the left page of facing pages.
„Top Page then Bottom
Scans the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages.
„Both Pages
Fax
Scans in page order.
„Left Page Only
Scans the left page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right
Page then Left] is selected.
„Right Page Only
Scans the right page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or
[Right Page then Left] is selected.
„Top Page Only
Scans the top page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is
selected.
„Bottom Page Only
Scans the bottom page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is
selected.
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scan Ratio)
This feature enlarges or reduces scanned images with a specified ratio.
Important • Some destination machines may not be able to receive faxes at the specified ratio.
1
2
Select [Reduce/Enlarge].
Select a preset ratio, or specify a
value.
Note
• If a magnification is specified
in [Reduce/Enlarge],
automatic rotation
transmission does not work.
„Copy ratio entry box
Touch the box displaying a value, and then use the numeric keypad or the [ ] and [ ]
buttons to specify a ratio within the range of 50 - 400% in 1% increments.
137
4
4 Fax
„100%
Scans at the same size as the original.
„Auto %
If the scan width of the document is greater than the maximum image size, the scanned
image is rotated or reduced to fit the maximum size.
When speed dialing is used, the maximum image size will be the size registered in
Address Number. When speed dialing is not used, the maximum size will be A3.
You can specify whether to rotate documents in the Tools. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax
Service Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Rotate 90 degrees" in the Administrator Guide.
„Copy ratio
Select from preset copy ratios
You can change the default values of reduce/enlarge scan ratios other than "100%" and "Auto %". For
information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" in the
Administrator Guide.
Fax
Stamp (Adding a Stamp when Scanning a Document)
This feature prints a circular stamp on the bottom corner of each document page when
it is fed through the document feeder. This helps you easily check if the document has
been scanned correctly.
4
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Important • Stamp marks cannot be printed to the following documents:
-
1
2
Documents placed on the document glass
Documents suspended by pressing the <Stop> button
Documents suspended by paper jams
Single-sided documents longer than 600 mm
Two-sided documents longer than 431.8 mm
Documents not fed into the document feeder.
Documents suspended due to memory overflow
Documents that were being scanned when the immediate transmission was suspended
Select [Stamp].
Select [On].
„Off
No stamp is added.
„On
A stamp is added.
138
Fax/Internet Fax Options
Fax/Internet Fax Options
You can specify fax transmission conditions in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Acknowledgement Report (Confirming Transmission Results) .............................................. 139
Starting Rate (Selecting a Communication Mode) .................................................................. 140
Priority Send / Delay Start (Specifying Send Priority/Send Time).......................................... 141
Transmission Header Text (Adding Sender Name and Phone Number to Faxes)................... 143
Cover Page (Transmitting Documents With a Cover Page) .................................................... 143
Internet Fax Subject (Specifying the Internet Fax Subject) ..................................................... 145
Message (Mail Contents) (Editing the Internet Fax Mail Contents)........................................ 146
Recipient Print Sets (Printing Multiple Sets at the Destination Machine)............................... 146
Multiple-Up (Combining Multiple Pages into One Sheet) ...................................................... 147
Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox).............................................................................. 147
F Code (Using F Code Transmission)...................................................................................... 149
Internet Fax Profile (Specifying Internet Fax Profiles)............................................................ 151
Fax
Encryption (Sending Internet Fax Encrypted by S/MIME) ..................................................... 152
Digital Signature (Sending Internet Fax with a Digital Signature by S/MIME)...................... 152
1
Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the [All
Services] screen.
2
Select the [Fax/Internet Fax
Options] tab, and then select a
feature on the [Fax/Internet Fax
Options] screen.
Note
4
• Only [Delay Start] is available
for the Server Fax feature.
Acknowledgement Report (Confirming Transmission Results)
You can check fax and Internet Fax transmission results.
To receive fax transmission results, enable [Acknowledgement Report]. By enabling
this feature, the machine automatically prints a transmission report when fax
transmission completes successfully, and prints a transmission report (undelivered)
when fax transmission ends unsuccessfully.
To receive Internet Fax transmission results, select [Read Receipts]. There are two
types of [Read Receipts]: [Read Receipts] and [Delivery Receipts]. Each has different
items that you can confirm.
When selecting [Read Receipts], you can check whether or not the Internet Fax you
sent was delivered to the recipient’s mailbox successfully. When selecting [Delivery
Receipts], you can check whether or not the Internet Fax you sent was correctly
delivered and the attached files were correctly processed.
139
4 Fax
Note
• The optional package is necessary to use the Read Receipts feature. For information,
contact our Customer Support Center.
• The Read Receipts feature can be used when the recipient’s machine supports MDN. The
Delivery Receipts feature can be used when the recipient’s machine supports DSN.
• You can select either [Read Receipts] or [Delivery Receipts] in the Tools. Refer to "5 Tools"
> "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Defaults" > "Delivery Receipts/Read Receipts" in the
Administrator Guide.
• You can only use the Delivery Receipts (DSN) feature to check the delivery of e-mail to
servers that support this feature. Furthermore, if any of the e-mail servers on the
transmission route do not support DSN, you cannot confirm the delivery of the e-mail, even if
the e-mail has been delivered successfully. For this reason, the result of the Delivery
Receipts may differ from the actual delivery status.
• If [Acknowledgement Report] is activated and the transmission completes unsuccessfully,
[Transmission Report - Job Undelivered] will be printed.
This section describes how to use the MDN feature. The procedure is the same for the
DSN feature.
1
2
Select [Acknowledgement Report].
Select any item.
Fax
„Confirmation Options
4
z
No Report
No transmission report is printed.
z
Print Report
A transmission report is automatically printed when the transmission completes
successfully. If the transmission does not end successfully, a "Transmission Report Job Undelivered" is printed.
„Read Receipts
z
Off
The Read Receipts feature is not activated.
z
On
The Read Receipts feature is activated. You can check whether the Internet Fax you
sent was delivered to the recipient's mailbox successfully.
Starting Rate (Selecting a Communication Mode)
You can select a communication mode based on the features of the remote machine.
G3 is the international standard for facsimile transmissions established by the ITU-T.
Important • When the speed dialing, one touch buttons, group dial numbers, or address book is used to
specify a recipient registered in an address number, the communications mode currently set
to the address number is set and cannot be changed. For information on how to register
address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add Address Book Entry" in
the Administrator Guide.
Note
140
• The default communication mode can be changed in the System Administration mode. For
information on how to change the default mode, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" >
"Fax Defaults" > "Starting Rate" in the Administrator Guide.
Fax/Internet Fax Options
1
Select [Starting Rate] on the [Fax/
Internet Fax Options] screen.
2
Set the communication mode.
„G3 Auto
Select this mode if the remote machine is G3 compatible. This mode is the one
normally selected.
In accordance with the reception capabilities of the remote machine, the machine
automatically switches modes in the following order: G3 Unique ECM J G3 Unique J
ITU-T G3 ECM J ITU-T G3.
„Forced 4800 bps
Select this mode when transmitting over noisy or poor telephone lines, as can be the
case with overseas calls.
Also select this mode when transmitting over noisy or poor telephone lines
domestically.
Fax
„G4 Auto
Do not use this mode.
Note
4
• [G4 Auto] is displayed on when Internet Fax Kit is installed. This setting applies the
transmission speed between the fax gateway and destination fax for the Internet Fax.
About [Forced 4800 bps]
You can communicate with faxes overseas via telephone company exchanges, etc.
Note
• The international telephone networks are originally designed for voice communications.
Noise that does not really affect voice communications causes a problem with fax
communications. It may result in the deterioration of images quality, the inability to transmit a
fax, or even terminate the transmission. Regardless of whether transmission is successful,
you are charged for the call once the line is connected. For information on line trouble and
call charges, contact your telephone company.
• If you select [Forced 4800 bps], the transmission time may be longer because transmission
is performed at 4800 bps or less to ensure transmission is successful.
1
Select [Starting Rate] on the [Fax/
Internet Fax Options] screen.
2
Select [Forced 4800 bps], then
[Save].
3
Enter the telephone company ID
number, "0011", country code, area code, and recipient fax number as shown below.
Important • In some areas, you may need to enter a pause after the telephone company ID number.
Priority Send / Delay Start (Specifying Send Priority/Send Time)
Priority Send allows you to give priority to a fax or polling job over other jobs.
Delay Start allows you to specify when to send your fax. This feature is useful for
sending fax when communication charges are low, such as during night time.
Note
• This feature is unavailable for Internet Fax and Server Fax.
141
4 Fax
• [Priority Send] can be set in combination with [Delay Start]. If both features are set, Priority
Send is performed at the set time.
1
2
Select [Priority Send / Delay Start].
Select any item.
„Priority Send
z
Off
Priority Send is not applied.
z
On
Priority Send is applied.
Note
• If the Priority Send feature is selected during transmission, the fax will be sent after the
current transmission ends.
• In redial mode, the fax will be resent preferentially after the set redial interval.
• The Priority Send feature cannot be set separately for each recipient of Broadcast and multipolling jobs.
You can give priority to a pending job. For more information, refer to "Job Status" (P.245).
Fax
„Delay Start
4
z
Off
Delay Start is not applied.
z
Specific Time
Delay Start is applied.
Important • If a power failure occurs or if the power is turned off after the Delay Start feature is set, the
setting is cleared and transmission begins as soon as the power is turned on.
Note
• You can specify a time within 24 hours in 1 minute increments. You cannot specify a date.
• You can set [Delay Start] separately for each address number. For information on how to
register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add Address Book
Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
• If address numbers or group dial numbers are used for the Broadcast Send feature, the
Delay Start setting specified for each address number is invalid.
• If the fax cannot be sent at the specified time because, for example, the telephone line is
busy, it will be sent as soon as the line becomes available.
„Specific Time
Displays the [Delay Start - Specific Time] screen.
Refer to "[Delay Start - Specific Time] Screen" (P.142).
[Delay Start - Specific Time] Screen
Allows you to specify the start time.
Important • The default value of [Specific Time] can be changed in the System Administration mode. For
more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Defaults" > "Delay Start
- Specific Time" in the Administrator Guide.
1
2
Select [AM] or [PM].
Enter [Hours] and [Minutes].
Important • If you press the <Start> button
after the specified time, the
stored document will be sent
at the specified time on the
following day.
142
Fax/Internet Fax Options
Transmission Header Text
(Adding Sender Name and Phone Number to Faxes)
The Transmission Header Text feature adds the start time, sender name, recipient
name, G3 ID, and number of pages onto the transmitted document.
This feature enables the recipient to confirm when and from whom the fax was sent.
Important • The Transmission Header Text is printed at the top of the document, so an area of about 3 to
5 mm may not be printed at the top of each page at the remote machine.
Note
• If the document is resent, "Resend" is printed at the left of the date and time indication.
• If this feature is enabled for Broadcast transmission, header information is attached to faxes
for all the recipients.
• The start time is printed in the format set on the machine (12 or 24 hour clock). For
information on setting the time, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Machine
Clock/Timers" in the Administrator Guide.
• The recipient name is only added if it has been registered in the address number.
For information on the sender name and G3 ID, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Local
Terminal Information" in the Administrator Guide.
1
2
4
Select [Transmission Header Text].
Select [Display Header].
„Off
No sender information is added.
„Display Header
Sender information is added.
Cover Page (Transmitting Documents With a Cover Page)
Cover Page is a feature for attaching a cover page to the document.
It includes the recipient name, comment, sender name, machine fax number, number
of pages, and send date and time.
[Cover Page] can be individually set for each address number. For information on how to register
address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the
Administrator Guide.
Note
• This feature is not available for the Server Fax feature.
• When [Transmission Header Text] is set, the sender information is not printed on the cover
page.
• You cannot use the Cover Page feature for Broadcast transmission using the numeric
keypad. To use this Cover Page feature for Broadcast transmission, register recipients to
address numbers.
• The size and resolution of the cover page is based on the first page of the document.
1
Select [Cover Page] on the [Fax/
Internet Fax Options] screen.
2
Select [Print Cover Page].
Fax
The default value of [Transmission Header Text] can be changed in the System Administration mode.
For information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax
Defaults" > "Transmission Header Text" in the Administrator Guide.
143
4 Fax
„Off
No cover note is added.
„Print Cover Page
A cover note is added.
„Recipient's Comment
The [Cover Page - Recipient's Comment] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Cover Page - Recipient's Comment] Screen" (P.144).
„Sender's Comment
The [Cover Page - Sender's Comment] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Cover Page - Sender's Comment] Screen" (P.144).
[Cover Page - Recipient's Comment] Screen
Select a comment to be added to the recipient field.
Fax
1
Select any item.
4
„No Report
No comment is added to the recipient field.
„Comment
A comment is added to the recipient field.
Select a comment from [Select Comment].
„Select Comment
The registered comments are displayed.
For information on how to register comments, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add Fax
Comment" in the Administrator Guide.
[Cover Page - Sender's Comment] Screen
Select a comment to be added to the sender field.
1
Select any item.
„No Report
No comment is added to the sender field.
„Comment
A comment is added to the sender field.
Select a comment from the registered comments.
„Select Comment
The registered comments are displayed.
144
Fax/Internet Fax Options
For information on how to register comments, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add Fax
Comment" in the Administrator Guide.
About the Cover Page
„To
When an address number is used, the recipient name registered for the address
number is printed. This field is blank if no recipient name is registered for the address
number.
„Recipient's Comment
Prints the comment selected on the [Cover Page - Recipient’s Comment] screen.
„From
Prints the registered sender name.
„Sender's Comment
Prints the comment selected on the [Cover Page - Sender’s Comment] screen.
Fax
„Fax Number
Prints the fax number of the machine. For G3 communications, "G3 ID" is printed.
4
„Number of Pages
Prints the number of pages.
„Send Date and Time
Prints the transmission date and time.
„Remarks
Prints remarks when the document is sent using Broadcast, Mailbox, Relay Broadcast,
or Redial Mode.
Internet Fax Subject (Specifying the Internet Fax Subject)
You can specify an Internet Fax subject. If no subject is specified, the preset subject
will be automatically entered.
Note
1
2
3
• This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Select [Internet Fax Subject].
Select [Keyboard].
Enter a subject using the keyboard
displayed. Up to 128 characters
can be entered.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
Note
• If no subject is entered, the following will be automatically entered as a subject:
[InternetFAX:<From> : <Send Date and Time>].
145
4 Fax
Message (Mail Contents) (Editing the Internet Fax Mail Contents)
You can edit Internet Fax mail comments. Enter text using the keyboard or use a preregistered comment.
Note
• This feature may not be available for some models. The optional package is necessary. For
more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
For information on how to register comments, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add Fax
Comment" in the Administrator Guide.
1
2
Select [Massage].
Select any item.
„Delete Text
Deletes the comment displayed on the screen.
„Keyboard
Fax
Allows you to enter body text using the keyboard. Up to 256 characters can be entered.
You can also click [Add Comment] to select a registered comment and edit it.
For information on how to enter the characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
4
„Add Comment
Allows you to insert a registered comment. Click this button to display the [Add
Comment] screen.
For information, refer to "[Add Comment] Screen" (P.146)
[Add Comment] Screen
Select a comment to be added.
1
Select any item.
„Comment
The registered comments are
displayed.
For information on how to register comments, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add Fax
Comment" in the Administrator Guide.
Recipient Print Sets (Printing Multiple Sets at the Destination Machine)
This feature allows you to print multiple sets of a fax document at the destination
machine.
Note
• This feature is not available for Server Fax.
1
Select [Recipient Print Sets] on the
[Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.
2
Select any item.
„1 Set
The destination machine will output one set of the fax document.
146
Fax/Internet Fax Options
„Multiple Sets
Allows you to specify the number of print sets within the range from 2 to 99 in
increments of 1. Use [ ] and [ ] or the numeric keypad on the screen to specify the
number of print sets.
Multiple-Up (Combining Multiple Pages into One Sheet)
This feature allows you to print multiple pages of a document onto one side of a single
sheet of paper. For example, if you have a document of 12 pages, and you select [3
Pages Up], the machine combines the scan data into 4 pages. You can specify a
multiple-up value in the range of 2 to 9.
Important • If the length of each resultant page is too long, the output data may be split on the recipient
machine.
• If number of pages of documents is smaller than the specified pages, scanned number of
pages will be only combined and transmitted.
Note
Select [Multiple-Up].
Fax
1
2
• This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Select [On].
4
„Off
Multiple-Up is not applied.
„On
Multiple-Up is applied. Specify the number of pages in [Originals]. Use [
enter the number of pages.
] and [
] to
Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox)
Remote Mailbox is a feature for sending or receiving confidential documents that you
do not want others to see.
Note
• This feature is not available for Server Fax.
„Sending to Mailbox (Fax Signal Method)
This feature allows you to send a document directly to a mailbox on the destination
machine. The document can be printed on the destination machine. To use this feature,
you need the mailbox number and passcode of the destination mailbox.
„Private Polling (Fax Signal Method)
This feature allows you to retrieve a document from a mailbox on a remote machine by
sending a polling request from your machine. To use this feature, you need the mailbox
number and passcode of the remote mailbox.
The retrieved document is stored in a mailbox on the machine. When a document is
received in a mailbox, the <Job in Memory> indicator lights and a [Mailbox Report] is
printed. The [Mailbox Report] includes the mailbox number and name.
Important • You cannot use polling to retrieve documents from multiple remote mailboxes
simultaneously.
Note
• The DTMF method is available for this feature. The supported signals are numerals, *, and
#.
147
4 Fax
For information on printing received documents, refer to "Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox"
(P.222).
Documents received in mailboxes can be automatically printed. For information on the mailbox settings,
refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.225).
Depending on the report print settings, a Mailbox Report may not be printed after a document is
received in a mailbox. For information on the report print settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common
Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Mailbox Report" in the Administrator Guide.
„Sending to Mailbox (DTMF Method)
To send a fax to a mailbox using the DTMF method, you need the mailbox number of
the destination mailbox. Two DTMF methods are available: Auto and Manual.
Sending to Mailbox (Fax Signal Method)
1
Select [Remote Mailbox] on the
[Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.
2
Select [On].
Fax
„Off
Disables the Remote Mailbox feature.
4
„On
Enables the Remote Mailbox feature. Enter a mailbox number into [Remote Mailbox
Number].
„Remote Mailbox Number
Enter a 3-digit mailbox number using the numeric keypad.
„Mailbox Passcode
Enter the 4-digit passcode of the remote mailbox using the numeric keypad. If a
passcode has not been set, leave this box blank.
Private Polling (Fax Signal Method)
1
Select [More Options] tab to
display the [More Options] screen.
2
3
4
5
Select [Remote Polling].
6
7
Select [Remote Mailbox].
Select [On].
Select [Save].
Select the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] tab to display the [Fax/Internet Fax Options]
screen.
Select [On].
„Off
Disables the Private Polling feature.
„On
Enables the Private Polling feature. Enter a mailbox number into [Remote Mailbox
Number].
148
Fax/Internet Fax Options
„Remote Mailbox Number
Enter a 3-digit mailbox number using the numeric keypad.
„Mailbox Passcode
Enter the 4-digit passcode of the remote mailbox using the numeric keypad. If a
passcode has not been set, leave this box blank.
Format for Auto Send (DTMF Method)
1
Select [New Recipients] to display a keyboard on the touch screen, and enter the
destination and passcode in the following format.
Mailbox number
on
remote machine
Passcode of
mailbox on
remote machine
Format for Manual Send (DTMF Method)
1
Fax
Select the [On-hook (Manual Send/Receive)] button on the [More Options] screen to
display a keyboard on the touch screen, and enter the destination and passcode in the
following format.
4
Mailbox number
on
remote machine
Note
Passcode of
mailbox on
remote machine
• Use the keyboard on the touch screen to enter symbols such as "!" and "∗". For information
on how to enter characters, "Entering Text" (P.47).
• Enter a passcode only if necessary.
• You can specify any machine that supports our DTMF method feature.
By registering destinations into address numbers using the above dialing formats, you can use the
address numbers for the Private Polling feature. For information on how to register address numbers,
refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
F Code (Using F Code Transmission)
F Code is the transmission procedure set by the Communications and Information
Network Association of Japan and is the T.30 (communication protocol) method for
using sub-addresses that was standardized by the ITU-T. The F Code feature enables
various features to be used with transmission among F Code-compatible machines
manufactured by different companies.
When using F Code transmission, use an F Code and password. The F Code, which is
also called a sub-address by other companies, must be registered (entered). Set the
password if necessary.
Note
• This feature is not available for Server Fax except when an F code is included in a dialing
number.
• To use the F Code feature, you need to confirm the F Code of the recipients machine in
advance.
You can set the F Code and password for each address number. For information on how to register
address numbers, refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.225).
You can use Relay Broadcast/Remote Relay Broadcast with F Code transmission. For information on
Relay Broadcast, refer to "Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station)"
(P.158).
149
4 Fax
You can use the following features with F Code transmission.
„Sending to Mailbox (F Code Method)
When a mailbox is set on a remote machine, you can send a document directly to the
mailbox by specifying the F code (sub-address) and password (if set up) of the mailbox.
Obtain the F Code (sub-address) and password of the destination mailbox in advance.
Example of specifying a destination:
F Code (sub-address)
: 0 (to designate an F Code transmission) and the
mailbox number of a mailbox on the remote machine
Password (if necessary)
: The password of the mailbox
„Private Polling (F Code Method)
When a mailbox is set on a remote machine, you can perform private polling for the
mailbox by specifying its F code (sub-address) and password (if set up).
If you use your machine to perform private polling for a mailbox on a remote machine,
obtain the F Code (sub-address) and password of the target mailbox.
Fax
If you use a remote machine to perform private polling for a mailbox on your machine,
give the following information.
4
F Code (sub-address)
: 0 (to designate an F Code transmission) and the
mailbox number of the target mailbox
Password (if necessary)
: The password of the target mailbox
Note
• Mailbox reception using the DTMF method is possible, but the only signals that can be
received are numerals, ∗, and #.
It may be possible to automatically print a document received in the mailbox depending on the mailbox
settings. For information about setting the mailbox, refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.225).
Depending on the report print settings, the [Mailbox Report] may not be printed even if e-mail is
received in the mailbox. For information on setting the report print settings, refer to "5 Tools" >
"Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Mailbox Report" in the Administrator Guide.
For information on printing received documents, refer to "Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox"
(P.222).
Sending to Mailbox (F Code Method)
1
Select [F Code] on the [Fax/
Internet Fax Options] screen.
2
3
Select [On].
Select [F Code], and then enter an
F code using numeric keys.
Note
4
• You can enter up to 20 digits for the F code.
If required, select [Password], and then enter a password using numeric keys.
Note
• You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.
„Off
The F code transmission is not used.
„On
The F code transmission is used. Enter the F Code.
„F Code
Enter the F code using the numeric keypad.
150
Fax/Internet Fax Options
Note
• You can enter up to 20 digits for the F Code.
„Password
Enter the password using the numeric keypad. If a password has not been set, leave
this box blank.
Note
• You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.
Private Polling (F Code Method)
1
Select [F Code] on the [Fax/
Internet Fax Options] screen.
2
3
Select [On].
Select [F Code], and then enter an
F code using numeric keys.
Note
4
• You can enter up to 20 digits for the F code.
If required, select [Password], and then enter a password using numeric keys.
• You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.
5
6
Select [Save].
7
Select [On].
Fax
Note
4
Select [Remote Polling] on the
[Mode Options] screen.
„Off
Private Polling is not used.
„On
Private Polling is used.
Internet Fax Profile (Specifying Internet Fax Profiles)
A profile is specified to restrict attribute information such as image resolution and paper
size for transmissions between Internet Fax-compatible machines.
Note
• This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• The profiles that can be processed differ depending on the Internet Fax-compatible machine
of the recipient. Before specifying a profile, confirm the profiles the Internet Fax-compatible
machine of the recipient can process.
• If inconsistency occurs between a profile, and stored document size and resolution, priority
is given to the settings specified in the profile.
• If the profile differs for each recipient when using Broadcast Send, the smallest size
becomes the maximum image size.
You can set an Internet Fax profile for each address number. For information on how to register address
numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator
Guide.
The default values of [Internet Fax Profile] can be changed in the System Administration mode. For
information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax
Defaults" > "Internet Fax Profile" in the Administrator Guide.
151
4 Fax
1
2
Select [Internet Fax Profile].
Select the profile.
„TIFF-S
This profile is the Internet Fax standard. For documents that are larger than A4, the size
is reduced automatically to A4 for transmission.
z
Encoding method
:
z
Stored Document Size :
A4
z
Resolution
Standard, Fine
:
MH
„TIFF-F
Select this profile when you specify super-fine for the resolution or when you send A3
or B4 documents.
Fax
4
z
Encoding method
z
Stored Document Size : A4, B4, A3
z
Resolution
Note
: MMR
: Standard, Fine, Superfine (400 dpi), Superfine (600 dpi)
• When a fax is sent to a machine that does not support TIFF-F, the recipient machine will not
be able to display or print the images.
„TIFF-J
Select this profile for sending documents in JBIG.
z
Encoding method
z
Stored Document Size : A4, B4, A3
z
Resolution
Note
: JBIG
: Standard, Fine, Superfine (400 dpi), Superfine (600 dpi)
• When a fax is sent to a machine that does not support TIFF-J, the recipient machine will not
be able to display or print the images.
Encryption (Sending Internet Fax Encrypted by S/MIME)
You can send Internet Fax encrypted by S/MIME.
When sending encrypted Internet Fax, select a recipient with a certificate that can be
encrypted from Address Book.
„Off
Sends Internet Fax without encryption.
„On
Sends encrypted Internet Fax.
Digital Signature (Sending Internet Fax with a Digital Signature by S/
MIME)
You can send Internet Fax with a digital signature by S/MIME.
Digital Signature allows a recipient to confirm whether the contents of the Internet Fax
are changed, or whether the Internet Fax is sent from the proper sender.
To use this feature, the machine's mail address must be linked to a certificate.
152
Fax/Internet Fax Options
For information on how to link a certificate to the machine’s e-mail address, refer to "12 Encryption and
Digital Signature Settings" > "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" > "Step 1
Configuration on the Machine" in the Administrator Guide.
„Off
Sends Internet Fax without a digital signature.
„On
Sends Internet Fax with a digital signature.
Fax
4
153
4 Fax
More Options
You can set the polling and on-hook features in the [More Options] screen. The
following shows the reference section for each feature.
Polling (Retrieving Documents from Remote Machines).........................................................154
Store for Polling (Allowing Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents from Your Machine) 155
On-hook (Confirming Remote Machine Response Prior to Transmission)..............................157
1
Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the [All
Services] screen.
2
Select the [More Options] tab, and
then select a feature on the [More
Options] screen.
Polling (Retrieving Documents from Remote Machines)
Fax
Polling is a feature that allows your machine to retrieve a document stored in a remote
machine. You are charged for the transmission fee.
4
This feature is used for Facsimile Information Services.
For information on Facsimile Information Services, refer to "Receiving Faxes" (P.167).
Note
• Depending on the remote machine, the Polling feature may be unavailable.
• This feature is not available for Server Fax.
• When you specify polling in combination with [Delay Start] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options]
screen, you can retrieve a document at a specified time.
„Remote Polling
You can retrieve a document stored on a remote machine by sending a poling request
from your machine. You can also retrieve documents from multiple machines. This is
known as Multi-Polling.
„Private Polling (DTMF Method)
You can retrieve a document from a mailbox on a remote machine by sending a request
from your machine. A mailbox must be created on the remote machine. If the mailbox
is passcode-protected, you can retrieve a document confidentially.
Important • You cannot use polling to retrieve documents from multiple remote mailboxes
simultaneously.
Remote Polling
1
Select [Remote Polling] on the
[More Options] screen.
2
Select [Poll a Remote Device].
Note
• To use Multi-Polling, specify
multiple recipients.
„Off
Disables the Polling feature.
„Poll a Remote Device
Enables the Polling feature.
154
More Options
Private Polling (DTMF Method)
1
2
Select [Remote Polling] on the [More Options] screen.
Select [On].
„Off
Disables the Private Polling feature.
„On
Enables the Private Poling feature.
3
Enter numbers in the format for Manual Send or Auto Send.
„Format for Auto Send
Use the keyboard that is displayed by selecting [New Recipients] on the [Fax/Internet
Fax] tab.
Passcode of
mailbox on
remote machine
Fax
Mailbox number
on
remote machine
4
„Format for Manual Send
Use the keyboard that is displayed by selecting the [On-hook (Manual Send/Receive)].
Mailbox number
on
remote machine
Note
Passcode of
mailbox on
remote machine
• Use the keyboard on the touch screen to enter symbols such as "!" and "∗". For information
on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
• Enter a passcode only if necessary.
• You can specify any machine that supports our DTMF method feature.
By registering destinations into address numbers using the above dialing formats, you can use the
address numbers for the Private Polling feature. For information on how to register address numbers,
refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
Store for Polling (Allowing Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents from
Your Machine)
Store for Polling is to store a document on your machine so as a remote machine can
retrieve it from your machine. There are two methods of Store for Polling: Public
Mailbox and Private Mailbox.
The machine can be set to automatically delete documents after they are retrieved with polling. For more
information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Polled Documents - Auto
Delete" in the Administrator Guide.
Note
• This feature is not available for Server Fax.
1
Select [Store for Polling] on the
[More Options] screen.
2
Select any item.
155
4 Fax
„Off
Disables this feature.
„Store for Free Polling
Stores the document into the public mailbox on the machine. The document in the
public mailbox can be retrieved by a remote machine.
„Store for Secure Polling
Stores the document into a private mailbox on the machine. If the mailbox is passcodeprotected, the document can be retrieved by a remote machine confidentially.
A private mailbox must be created on the machine. For more information on registering a mailbox, refer
to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Create Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.
„Save in:
z
When selecting [Store for Free Polling]
The [Public Mailbox] button is displayed. When the button is selected, the [Public
Mailbox] screen appears.
Fax
For more information, refer to "[Public Mailbox] Screen" (P.156).
z
4
When selecting [Store for Secure
Polling]
The [Private Mailbox] button is
displayed. When the button is
selected, the [Mailbox] screen
appears. Select a mailbox to store
documents.
For information on how to select a mailbox, refer to "Selecting a Mailbox" (P.220). For information on
how to check and print/delete documents for Secure Polling, refer to "Checking/Operating Documents
in a Mailbox" (P.221).
[Public Mailbox] Screen
You can print and delete documents stored for polling.
1
Select the document to print or
delete. You can select either one
document or all documents.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
„Refresh
Refreshes the information about documents stored in the public mailbox.
„Select All
Selects all documents stored in the public mailbox.
„Delete
Deletes the selected document. Selecting this button displays a confirmation screen.
Select [Yes] on the screen to delete the document.
„Print
Prints the selected document.
156
More Options
On-hook (Confirming Remote Machine Response Prior to Transmission)
Use this feature when using Manual Send.
Manual Send is the transmission method that allows you to send a fax after you make
a phone call to a destination machine and then check that the connection is
established. This feature can be used with the receiver (optional) either off-hook or onhook.
It is recommended that you set the line monitor volume to "Loud".
Note
• If an error occurs during transmission of, for example, the second page, the transmission of
the first page may also end abnormally.
The volume of the line monitor can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on
how to change the volume, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Line
Monitor Volume" in the Administrator Guide.
Lift the receiver, or select [On-hook
(Manual Send/Receive)] on the
[More Options] screen.
2
Select any item.
Fax
1
4
„Manual Receive/Manual Send
Use the drop-down menu to switch between [Manual Receive] and [Manual Send].
z
Manual Send: Allows you to check if connection is established before sending a fax.
z
Manual Receive: Allows you to receive a fax manually, such as Facsimile Information
Services.
„Alphanumeric character buttons
Displays alphanumeric characters. Use alphanumeric characters to specify a
destination.
Note
• Touch-tone dialing may not be available depending on the services provided.
• When the dial type is Tone, the [Tone (:)] button is not displayed on the screen. When the
dial type is Pulse, select [Tone (:)] if you want to use touch-tone dialing.
„More Characters
Selecting this button displays a symbol screen, allowing you to use symbols to specify
a destination.
„Exit (Line Cut)
Cuts the line connected.
157
4 Fax
Broadcast
This section describes setting Broadcast Send and Relay Broadcast.
Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients).............................................................158
Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station).....................................158
Remote Relay Broadcast (Performing Relay Broadcast to Remote Locations) .......................162
Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients)
The Broadcast Send feature allows you to transmit the same document to multiple
recipients with a single operation. There is no need to repeat the same operation for
each recipient.
If you specify Broadcast Send, the machine prints a relay broadcast report/multi-poll
report after the Broadcast Send operation finishes.
Note
Fax
• The maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows: Using the
numeric keypad: 200 locations; using address numbers: 500 locations; and using the
numeric keypad in combination with address numbers: 699 locations.
• When an Address Book Extension Kit (optional) is installed, the maximum number of
recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows: Using address numbers: 999
locations; and using the numeric keypad in combination with address numbers: 1198
locations.
4
• One touch buttons are associated with address numbers 001 to 070.
• When using Broadcast Send, the Cover Page and Remote Mailbox features are not
available even if they are enabled on the control panel. If you want to use [Cover Page] and
[Remote Mailbox], set them when registering each recipient in an address number.
• The Acknowledgement Report feature is not available. Check Broadcast/Multi-poll reports to
see transmission results.
1
Select the first recipient on the
[Fax/Internet Fax] screen.
2
3
4
5
6
Select [+Add].
Select the next recipient.
Repeat Step 2 and Step 3.
Press the <Start> button.
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to start transmission.
Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station)
The Relay Broadcast feature transmits documents to multiple recipients via other fax
machines (relay stations). When a document is to be transmitted over a long distance
to multiple recipients, it is first transmitted to one relay station and from there to multiple
recipients. When you transmit documents over a long distance to many recipients,
using Relay Broadcast can save on call charges.
Furthermore, multiple Relay Broadcast operations can be performed simultaneously.
This is referred to as Multiple Relay Broadcast.
There are three Relay Broadcast methods.
158
Broadcast
„Fax Signal Method
This method employs a Fuji Xerox proprietary communication procedure that is only for
use with specific machines that have the Relay Broadcast feature. The G3 mode is
available.
„DTMF Method
G3 fax machines that support Manual Send can make Relay Broadcast for the
machine.
„F Code Method
This method can be used among machines that have the F Code and the Relay
Broadcast features. The G3 is available.
Before using the Relay Broadcast Feature
Before using the Relay Broadcast feature, register the following information in the
address numbers of initiating stations and relay stations.
For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add
Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
Fax
Where
Contents
Initiating
Station
Fax Signal Method
Assign the relay station to an address number (001 to 500*) to set up the Relay
Broadcast feature.
z Register the last two digits of the address number of the initiating station
(which is already registered at a relay station) as a relay station ID for the
Relay Broadcast operation.
z Register the address numbers or group dial number of the relay recipients
(which are registered at a relay station) as broadcast recipients. The wildcard
"∗" can be used.
DTMF Method (G3)/F Code Method
z
No registration is required. The dialing format can be registered to an address
number.
Relay
Station
Fax Signal Method
z Assign the initiating station to an address number from 001 to 099 and set
Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On].
z
Assign the relay recipient to an address number from 001 to 099. The relay
recipients can also be assigned group dial numbers from the initiating station.
DTMF Method (G3)/F Code Method
z Assign the initiating station either to an address number from 001 to 500*
(when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code)
or to 001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2
digits in F Code). Then, set Relay Station Setup of the address number to
[On].
z
Assign the relay recipients to an address number.
Assign the relay recipient either to a relay station address number from 001 to
500 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F
Code) or to 001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station
is 2 digits in F Code).
* When the Speed Dial Extension Kit is installed, it will be 001 to 999.
Note
• The above describes using Relay Broadcast with the machine. When using a machine of a
different model as a relay station, obtain the F Code (sub-address) and password of the
target recipient machine.
159
4
4 Fax
Fax Signal Method
1
Select an address number or group dial number to which a relay broadcast is
registered and press the <Start> button.
To perform Multiple Relay Broadcast, repeat this step.
DTMF Method
There are two methods in the DTMF method: Auto Send and Manual Send.
Auto Send (transmitting without picking up the receiver)
1
Select [New Recipients] to display the keyboard on the touch screen and enter in the
following format.
2
Select [+Add] to perform Multiple Relay Broadcast.
Fax
Note
• You can specify up to 20 locations for relay recipients.
„Password
4
A pre-registered two-digit number
Note
• By default, no password is set. For setting a password, contact our Customer Support
Center. If a password has not been set, you do not need to enter one.
„Relay station ID
The last two digits of the initiating station address number registered at the relay
station
„Address number
An address number for the relay recipients registered at the relay station
The wildcard "∗" can also be used.
3
The above dialing format can be registered in an address number to send using the address number. For
information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add
Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
Press the <Start> button.
Manual Send (transmitting with picking up the receiver or on-hook)
160
1
Select the [More Options] tab to
display the [More Options] screen.
2
Select [On-hook (Manual Send/
Receive)].
3
Select [Manual Send] from the
drop-down menu.
4
Use the keyboard shown in the
touch screen to enter numbers in
the following format.
Broadcast
Note
• You can specify up to 20 locations for relay recipients.
F Code Method
When the machine is an initiating station, you can perform Relay Broadcast by
registering the relay station’s F code and password (if necessary) to the machine.
When the machine is a relay station, you can perform Relay Broadcast by registering
the machine’s F code and password (if necessary) to an initiating station.
Important • When performing Relay Broadcast with the F Code method, you can use a password if you
set a receive password for the relay station.
Note
• When performing Relay Broadcast with machines of this model, we recommend using the
fax signal method.
• When using a machine of a different model as a relay station, confirm the F Code (subaddress) and password of the target recipient machine.
When using the machine as a relay station, the F Code that is transmitted to the
initiating station is as follows.
Print
Directive
Relay
Station ID
Address
Number
Address
Number
Address
Number
Fax
Relay Broadcast
....
4
Up to 20 digits
„Relay Broadcast
The number of digits of the relay station ID:
1: When the relay station IDs and address numbers are two digits
2: When the relay station IDs and address numbers are three digits
„Print Directive
Printing/not printing at the relay station
1: Printing at the relay station
0: Not printing at the relay station
„Relay Station ID
An address number for an initiating station registered at the relay station
When the relay station ID is set, the initiating station is notified of the results of a Relay
Broadcast.
When the relay station ID is "00" or "000", the initiating station is not notified of the
results of a Relay Broadcast.
„Address Number
The address number assigned to the relay recipient
The following shows an example of F Code that indicates printing at the relay station,
notifying the initiating station (100) of the results, and performing Relay Broadcast to
relay recipients (200, 201, 202 and 203).
F Code Example: 21100200201202203
161
4 Fax
1
Select the [Fax/Internet Fax
Options] tab to display the [Fax/
Internet Fax Options] screen.
2
3
4
Select [F Code].
Select [On].
Enter the F Code with the numeric keypad.
Note
5
• You can enter up to 20 digits for the F Code.
If necessary, enter the password using the numeric keypad.
Important • You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.
Remote Relay Broadcast (Performing Relay Broadcast to Remote
Locations)
Fax
The Remote Relay Broadcast feature combines two or more Relay Broadcast
operations and use Broadcast Send.
This feature is more economical than Relay Broadcast in transmitting documents to
multiple remote machines.
4
Note
• Multiple Relay Broadcast can be performed from a secondary relay station.
There are three Relay Broadcast methods.
„Fax Signal Method
This method employs a Fuji Xerox proprietary communication procedure that is only for
use with specific machines that have the Relay Broadcast feature. The G3 is available.
„DTMF Method
G3 fax machines that support Manual Send can make Remote Relay Broadcast for the
machine.
„F Code Method
This method can be used among machines that have the F Code and the Relay
Broadcast features. The G3 is available.
Fax Signal Method
Register the following information in the address numbers of initiating stations and relay
stations in advance.
For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add
Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
162
Broadcast
Where
Contents
Initiating
Station
Assign the relay station to an address number (001 to 500*) to set up the Relay
Broadcast feature.
z
Register the last two digits of the address number of the initiating station
(which is already registered at a primary relay station) as a relay station ID.
z Register the address numbers or group dial number of the secondary relay
stations (which are registered at a primary relay station) as broadcast
recipients.
Primary
Relay
Station
Assign the initiating station to an address number from 001 to 099 and set
Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On].
Assign the secondary relay station to an address number from 001 to 099.
z As the relay station ID, assign the last two digits of the address number for
the primary relay station that is registered to the secondary relay station.
z As the broadcast recipients, assign the address number for the relay
recipients that have been registered to the secondary relay station.
* When the Speed Dial Extension Kit is installed, it will be 001 to 999.
1
Select an address number or group dial number to which a remote relay broadcast is
registered and press the <Start> button.
DTMF Method
Register the following information in the address numbers of the primary relay station
and the secondary relay station in advance.
For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add
Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
Where
Primary
Relay
Station
Contents
Assign the initiating station to an address number from 001 to 500* and set
Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On].
Assign the secondary relay station to an address number from 001 to 500*.
z As the relay station ID, assign the last two digits of the Address Number for
the primary relay station that is registered to the secondary relay station.
z
As the broadcast recipients, assign the Address Number for the relay
recipients that have been registered to the secondary relay station.
Secondary Assign the primary relay station to the same address number as that of the
initiating station registered at the primary relay station, and set Relay Station
Relay
Setup of the address number to [On].
Station
Assign the relay recipient to an address number from 001 to 500*.
* When the Speed Dial Extension Kit is installed, it will be 001 to 999.
Important • You can specify any machine that supports our DTMF method feature.
163
Fax
Secondary Assign the primary relay station to the same address number as that of the
initiating station registered at the primary relay station, and set Relay Station
Relay
Setup of the address number to [On].
Station
Assign the relay recipient to an address number from 001 to 500*.
Relay recipients of address number 100 or above can be registered to a group
and specified by address number.
4
4 Fax
Auto Send (transmitting without picking up the receiver)
1
Select [New Recipients] to display the keyboard on the touch screen and enter in the
following format.
2
Select [+Add] to perform Multiple Relay Broadcast.
„Password
A pre-registered two-digit number
Note
• By default, no password is set. For setting a password, contact our Customer Support
Center. If a password has not been set, you do not need to enter one.
„Relay Station ID
The last two digits of the initiating station address number registered at the primary
relay station
Fax
„Address Number
The address number for the secondary relay station registered at the primary relay
station
4
The above dialing format can be registered in an address number to send using the address number. For
information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add
Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
Manual Send (transmitting with picking up the receiver or on-hook)
1
Select the [More Options] tab to
display the [More Options] screen.
2
Pick up the telephone receiver, or
select [On-hook (Manual Send/
Receive)].
3
Select [Manual Send] from the
drop-down menu.
4
Use the keyboard shown in the
touch screen to enter numbers in
the following format.
Note
• You can specify up to 20 locations for relay recipients.
F Code Method
When using the machine as the initiating station for performing Remote Relay
Broadcast, confirm the F Code and the password (if necessary) for the primary relay
station.
When using the machine as the primary relay station for performing Remote Relay
Broadcast, inform the initiating station of the F Code (sub-address) and the password
(if necessary) and confirm the F Code for the secondary relay station.
When using the machine as the secondary relay station for performing Remote Relay
Broadcast, inform the primary relay station of the F Code and the password (if
necessary).
164
Broadcast
Register the following information in the address numbers of the primary relay station
and the secondary relay station in advance.
Where
Primary
Relay
Station
Contents
Assign the initiating station either to an address number from 001 to 500* (when
the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or to 001
to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F
Code). Then, set Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On].
Assign the secondary relay station either to an address number from 001 to
500* (when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F
Code) or to 001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is
2 digits in F Code).
z As the relay station ID, assign the last two digits of the Address Number for
the primary relay station that is registered to the secondary relay station.
z
As the broadcast recipients, assign the Address Number for the relay
recipients that have been registered to the secondary relay station.
* When the Speed Dial Extension Kit is installed, it will be 001 to 999.
Important • When using the F Code method for Remote Relay Broadcast, the primary relay stations and
secondary relay stations must support our F Code method and be equipped with the Relay
Broadcast feature.
Note
• When performing Relay Broadcast with machines of this model, we recommend using the
fax signal method.
When using the machine as a relay station, the F Code that is transmitted to the
initiating station is as follows.
Relay Broadcast
Print
Directive
Primary
Relay
Station ID
Address
Number
Address
Number
Address
Number
....
Up to 20 digits
„Relay Broadcast
The number of digits of the relay station ID:
1: When the relay station IDs and address numbers are two digits
2: When the relay station IDs and address numbers are three digits
„Print Directive
Printing/not printing at the relay station
1: Printing at the primary relay station
0: No printing at the primary relay station
165
Fax
Secondary Assign the primary relay station to the same address number as that of the
initiating station registered at the primary relay station, and set Relay Station
Relay
Setup of the address number to [On].
Station
Assign the relay recipients either to an address number from 001 to 500* (when
the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or to 001
to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F
Code).
4
4 Fax
„Primary Relay Station ID
The address number for the initiating station registered at the primary relay station
When the primary relay station ID is set, the initiating station is notified of the results of
the Remote Relay Broadcast.
When the relay station ID is "00" or "000", the initiating station is not notified of the
results of a Remote Relay Broadcast.
„Address Number
The address number assigned to the secondary relay station
The operating procedure is the same as for Relay Broadcast.
Fax
4
166
Receiving Faxes
Receiving Faxes
There are two reception modes: Auto Receive and Manual Receive.
In the Auto Receive mode, reception of a fax from a remote machine begins
automatically.
In the Manual Receive mode, reception of a fax from a remote machine is manual. This
mode is convenient for confirming the sender or using an external telephone to confirm
whether it is a fax before beginning reception.
The Fax Receiving Mode default value can be changed in the System Administration mode. For
information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax
Control" > "Fax Receiving Mode" in the Administrator Guide.
Switching between Auto Receive and Manual Receive
Press the <Machine Status> button.
2
Select [Fax Receiving Mode] on
the [Machine Status] screen.
3
Fax
1
4
Select [Manual Receive] or [Auto
Receive].
„Manual Receive
Reception of a fax from a remote machine is manual. This mode is convenient for
confirming the sender or using an external telephone to confirm whether it is a fax
before beginning reception.
„Auto Receive
Reception of a fax from a remote machine begins automatically.
Using Auto Receive
When the machine is in the Auto Receive mode, it automatically answers incoming
calls and receives documents.
Note
• You can set the length of time that the machine rings when there is an incoming call. While
the machine is ringing, you can pick up the telephone and then talk if the call is from a
telephone, or you can receive a fax manually if the call is from a fax machine.
167
4 Fax
Using Manual Receive
If the fax reception mode is set to [Manual Receive] when the machine rings to notify
of an incoming call, pick up the receiver of the external telephone or select [On-hook]
on the screen that appears.
Note
• We recommend setting the monitor volume to [Loud] when using the On-hook feature. The
volume of the line monitor can be changed in the System Administration mode. For
information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service
Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Line Monitor Volume" in the Administrator Guide.
1
When the machine rings, the screen appears.
2
If there is a telephone, pick the receiver up. If not, select [On-hook] from the [Receiving]
screen.
Confirm whether the call is from a telephone or a fax machine.
If the call is from a telephone, use the receiver to talk.
If the call is from a fax machine, you will hear the sound of a fax machine.
Note
Fax
3
4
4
• If [On-hook] was selected, you will hear the sound from the machine speaker. However, you
cannot talk to the other party.
Press the <Start> button.
If you picked up the receiver, put it back in the cradle when the <Online> indicator on
the control panel lights up.
Important • Make sure that the receiver is placed properly in the cradle. Otherwise, the line will remain
"busy".
Using Mailbox Receive
Documents received using Mailbox Receive are stored in a mailbox. After receiving a
document, the <Job in Memory> indicator lights up and the machine prints a mailbox
report. The mailbox number and the mailbox name are printed on the mailbox report.
To receive a Mailbox Receive document using F Code transmission, notify the sender
of the following information:
z
F Code (sub-address): 0 (represents F Code transmission) and the storage mailbox
number.
z
Password (if necessary): the passcode of the mailbox in which the document is
stored.
Note
• Mailbox reception using the DTMF method is possible, but the only signals that can be
received are numerals, *, and #.
Depending on the report print settings, a mailbox report may not be printed even if there is a received
document in the mailbox. For more information on the Mailbox Report settings, refer to "5 Tools" >
"Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Mailbox Report" in the Administrator Guide.
For information on how to print a document stored in a mailbox, refer to "Printing/Deleting Documents
in the Mailbox" (P.222).
168
Facsimile Information Services
Facsimile Information Services
For information on subscriptions and advanced operating procedures, contact the
corresponding facsimile information service.
Using the Receiver
Pick up the receiver of the external
telephone.
2
Select [Manual Receive].
Fax
1
4
3
Specify the fax number of the
facsimile information service.
z
The call destination can be specified using the numeric keypad, address numbers,
or one touch buttons. The address book cannot be used.
z
The call destination can be specified also with the keyboard displayed on the screen.
Pressing [More Characters] on the screen displays symbols.
Note
• When the line type is set to a pulse line, [Tone (:)] does not appear.
• If you want to send tones (or to use the touch-tone services) while using a pulse line, select
[Tone (:)].
• Some touch-tone services may not be available even if you set your telephone to send
tones.
4
When the machine connects to the service, you will hear voice prompts. Follow the
voice prompts to enter the required numbers.
5
When input is finished, press the <Start> button.
Note
6
• The <Online> indicator on the control panel lights and reception begins.
Place the receiver back in the cradle.
Make sure that the receiver is placed properly in the cradle. Otherwise, the line will remain "busy".
169
4 Fax
When Not Using a Receiver
1
Adjust the volume of the line monitor.
We recommend setting the volume of the line monitor to [Loud] so that it is easy to
hear the voice prompts.
For information on how to change the volume of the line monitor, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common
Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Line Monitor Volume" in the Administrator Guide.
Fax
2
Select [On-hook (Manual Send/
Receive)] on the [More Options]
screen.
3
Select [Manual Receive] from the
drop-down menu.
4
Specify the fax number of the
facsimile information service.
4
z
The call destination can be specified using the numeric keypad address numbers, or
one touch buttons. The address book cannot be used.
z
The call destination can also be specified using the keyboard displayed on the
screen.
Note
• When the line type is set to a pulse line, [Tone (:)] does not appear. If you want to send tones
(or to use the touch-tone services) while using a pulse line, select [Tone (:)]
• Some touch-tone services may not be available even if you set your telephone to send
tones.
170
5
When the machine connects to the service, you will hear voice prompts. Follow the
voice prompts to enter the required numbers.
6
When input is finished, press the <Start> button.
5 Scan
This chapter describes the basic scanning procedures and the scan features
provided by the machine.
Note
• The scan features are not available for some models. To use the features, an
optional package will be necessary. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.
To use the scan features, network settings are required. For information on the network settings,
refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
z
Scanning Procedure .................................................................................172
z
Operations during Scanning .....................................................................178
z
E-mail........................................................................................................180
z
Scan to Mailbox ........................................................................................187
z
Network Scanning.....................................................................................188
z
Scan to PC................................................................................................189
z
General Settings .......................................................................................192
z
Advanced Settings....................................................................................202
z
Layout Adjustment ....................................................................................205
z
E-mail Options/Filing Options ...................................................................211
5 Scan
Scanning Procedure
This section describes the basic scanning procedure. The following shows the
reference section for each step.
Step 1 Loading Documents .......................................................................................................172
Step 2 Selecting Features ..........................................................................................................174
Step 3 Starting the Scan Job......................................................................................................175
Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job Status ..........................................................................176
Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data ...............................................................................................177
Step 1 Loading Documents
There are two methods for loading documents:
„Document Feeder (Optional)
z
Single sheet
z
Multiple sheets
Scan
„Document Glass
5
z
Single sheet
z
Bound documents, such as books
Document Feeder
The document feeder supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from
115 x 125 mm to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).
The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For nonstandard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.
For information about document sizes that can be detected automatically, or how to enter variable sizes,
refer to "Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size)" (P.207).
The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in
the System Administration mode. For information about paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" >
"Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.
Document Type (Weight)
Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2)
Plain paper (50 - 80
g/m2)
Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 g/m2)
Number of
Sheets
75 sheets
75 sheets
50 sheets
Important • To avoid paper jams, use the document glass for folded or creased documents.
• Two sided scanning of lightweight paper 38 - 49 g/m2 is not supported.
For information about scanning mixed sized documents, refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning
Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.207).
172
Scanning Procedure
1
Remove any paper clips and
staples before loading the
document.
2
Place the documents face up
(when the documents are 2-sided,
place the front side up) in the
center of the document feeder
Note
3
• In normal occasions, load the
document in the [Head to Left]
orientation. When viewing the
scanned document on a computer, the document is displayed in the [Head to Top]
orientation.
• The indicator lights up when the document is loaded correctly.
Adjust the movable document
guides to match the size of the
document loaded.
Scan
5
Document Glass
The document glass supports a single sheet, a book, or other similar documents up to
297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).
Important • After using the document glass, close the document cover.
The document glass automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard
size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.
For information about document sizes that can be detected automatically, or how to enter variable sizes,
refer to "Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size)" (P.207).
The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in
the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" >
"Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
CAUTION
Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the document glass. It may
break the glass and cause injuries.
1
Open the document cover.
Important • Ensure that a screen is
displayed on the control
panel, and then load a
document. If a document is
loaded before a screen is
displayed, the machine may
not properly detect the
document size.
173
5 Scan
2
Place the document face down,
and align it against the top left
corner of the document glass.
3
Close the document cover.
Step 2 Selecting Features
On the [All Services] screen, you can select from 4 scan modes: E-mail, Scan to
Mailbox, Network Scanning, and Scan to PC. You can select features on each mode.
Note
• Features displayed may vary depending on the model of your machine.
• When the Auditron mode used, a user ID and passcode may be required. Ask your system
administrator for the user ID and passcode.
• To use the scan features, network settings are required. For information on the network
settings, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
Scan
„E-mail
Scans a document, and sends the scanned data as an e-mail attachment after
converting the data to TIFF, JPEG, PDF, Docuworks, or XPS.
5
„Scan to Mailbox
Scans a document and saves the scanned data into a mailbox on the machine.
You need to create a mailbox in advance. For information on how to create a mailbox, refer to "5 Tools"
> "Setup & Calibration" > "Create Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.
„Network Scanning
Scans a document using a job template created on CentreWare Internet Services.
When Scan to Home is enabled, and when the Access Remote feature is available, the
scanned document can be transferred to a different destination based on an
authenticated user.
„Scan to PC
Scans a document and sends the scanned data to a network computer via the FTP or
SMB protocol.
The following describes how to store scanned data into a mailbox.
1
Press the <All Services> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
174
<All Services>
button
Scanning Procedure
2
Select [Scan to Mailbox].
3
If the previous settings still remain,
press the <Clear All> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Clear All>
button
C
4
Specify a mailbox to save the data
in.
5
Select each tab, and configure
features as necessary.
Scan
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
"General Settings" (P.192)
5
"Advanced Settings" (P.202)
"Layout Adjustment" (P.205)
"E-mail Options/Filing Options" (P.211)
Step 3 Starting the Scan Job
The following describes how to start a scan job.
1
Press the <Start> button.
Important • If the document has been set
in the document feeder, do not
hold down the document while
it is being conveyed.
Note
• If a problem occurs, an error
message appears in the touch
screen. Solve the problem in
accordance with the message.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Start> button
C
• The next scan job can
proceed while scanning.
„If you have more documents
If you have more documents to scan, select [Next Original] on the touch screen while
the current document is being scanned. This allows you to scan the documents as a
single set of data.
Up to 999 pages can be stored.
Note
• If the number of document pages exceeds the maximum, then scanning stops. Follow the
displayed message, and either abort the operation, or save the scanned data.
175
5 Scan
2
While documents are being
scanned, select [Next Original].
Note
• When using the document feeder, load the next document after the machine has finished
scanning the first document.
• When the screen shown above is displayed and no operation is performed for a certain
period of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents.
3
Load the next document.
Scan
• You can change the scan settings of the next document by selecting the [Change Settings]
button that is displayed after selecting [Next Original].
4
Press the <Start> button.
If you have more documents, repeat Steps 3 and 4.
5
5
When all documents have been
scanned, select [Last Original].
Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job Status
The following describes how to confirm the status of a scan job.
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Job Status>
button
C
2
Confirm the job status.
From the drop-down menu, you can
select and display the job types ([All
Jobs], [Printer & Print from M’box],
[Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax], [Job
flow, auto file transfer]).
Note
176
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
Scanning Procedure
Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data
When you used the Scan-to-Mailbox feature, the document stored in a mailbox of the
machine can be imported into your computer using the following:
„Import using an application
Use a network scan driver.
Refer to "Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application" (P.270).
„Import using Mailbox Viewer 3
Use Mailbox Viewer 3 (Fuji Xerox application software).
Refer to "Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3" (P.272).
„Import using CentreWare Internet Services
Use CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer to "Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.274).
„Import using EasyOperator
Use EasyOperator.
Scan
Refer to "Importing Using EasyOperator" (P.275).
5
177
5 Scan
Operations during Scanning
The following describes the operations available during scanning. The following shows
the reference for each operation.
Stopping the Scan Job ...............................................................................................................178
Changing Scan Settings ............................................................................................................179
Stopping the Scan Job
To cancel scanning a document, follow the procedure below.
1
Press either [Delete] on the touch
screen or the <Stop> button on the
control panel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Stop> button
Scan
C
5
2
Select [Delete].
„If the screen shown in step 1 does not appear:
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
2
Select the job to cancel, and then
select [Delete].
Note
178
• If you cancel the job, scanned
data stored in the mailbox will
also be deleted.
<Job Status>
button
Operations during Scanning
Changing Scan Settings
You can change scan settings while scanning the document.
1
Select [Next Original].
2
Select [Change Settings...].
3
Set [Color Scanning], [Original Type], [Image Options], [Resolution],[2 Sided
Scanning], and [Original size].
"Color Scanning (Selecting the Color To Scan)" (P.192).
"Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.194).
"Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)" (P.205).
Scan
"2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.205).
"Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size)" (P.207).
5
"Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness)" (P.202).
4
Press the <Start> button.
179
5 Scan
E-mail
The following describes how to select features on the [E-mail] screen.
You can scan a document and send the scanned data as an e-mail attachment after
converting the data to TIFF, JPEG, PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS. The following shows the
reference section for each feature.
Address Book (Specifying an E-mail Address) ........................................................................180
New Recipients (Entering an Address).....................................................................................183
Add Me (Adding the Sender’s Address)...................................................................................183
Recipient(s) (Editing a Recipient).............................................................................................184
From (Setting the Sender’s Address) ........................................................................................185
Subject (Setting the Subject).....................................................................................................185
Message (Entering the E-mail Body)........................................................................................186
The [Read Receipts] and [Split Send] features on the [Output Format] screen are only
available for the [E-mail] feature. The following shows the reference section for each
feature.
Read Receipts (Specifying Read Receipts)...............................................................................212
Scan
Split Send (Sending in Sections)...............................................................................................212
Note
5
Some e-mail settings are required to use this feature. for information on configuring scanner, refer to "9
"Scanner Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
• This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary to use the
feature. For details, contact our Customer Support Center.
1
Select [E-mail] on the [All Services]
screen.
2
On the [E-mail] screen, specify
recipients using the Address Book
or the keyboard.
Important • You can only specify recipients registered for e-mail.
• Recipients cannot be specified with address numbers using the numeric keypad, one-touch
buttons, or group numbers.
• Depending on the settings in the Tools, the [Keyboard], and [Add Me] buttons are not
displayed.
Address Book (Specifying an E-mail Address)
The following describes how to select a recipient using the Address Book.
When sending an encrypted e-mail, select an e-mail address associated with a valid
certificate from the Address Book.
To use this feature, an e-mail address associated with a certificate for S/MIME must be registered in the
Address Book. For information on the Address Book, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add
Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
To encrypt an e-mail, prior settings are required. For information on the settings, refer to "12 Encryption
and Digital Signature Settings" > "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" in the
Administrator Guide.
To verify invalidity of a certificate, prior settings are required. For information on the settings, refer to
"5 Tools" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Security Settings" > "Certificate Revocation Retrieval
Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
Note
180
• While displaying the Address Book, if a message indicating "Validating..." appears on the
screen, you can not start a scan job until the message disappears.
E-mail
1
Select [Address Book].
2
From the [Address Books] list,
select [List all public entries],
[Search Public], or [Search
Network].
Note
• When specifying multiple
recipients, specify them
continuously.
3
Select a recipient from the address
list, and then select [To], [CC], or
[BCC].
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 as
necessary.
Scan
„List all public entries
Displays the local address list.
Refer to "When [List all public entries] is Selected" (P.182).
5
„Search Public
Searches recipients in the local address list.
Refer to "When [Search Public] or [Search Network] is Selected" (P.182).
„Search Network
Searches recipients in the remote address list.
Refer to "When [Search Public] or [Search Network] is Selected" (P.182).
„Name/E-mail Address
Lists names and their e-mail addresses.
„To
Sets the selected address as a recipient.
„CC
Sets the selected address as CC.
„BCC
Sets the selected address as BCC.
„Details
Displays detailed information on the selected recipient.
„Show Address
Placing a check mark in the box displays only e-mail addresses in the list.
181
5 Scan
When [List all public entries] is Selected
1
Select a recipient from the local
address list.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
When [Search Public] or [Search Network] is Selected
1
Enter keywords to search for an
address.
For information on how to enter
characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
Note
• When multiple keywords are
used, the address is searched
with the AND clause.
• The screen on the right appears when [Search Public] is selected.
„Name
Scan
Searches with a recipient name as a keyword. Selecting [Enter/Change Keyword]
displays the screen for entering the keyword. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
5
Example: John Smith
„E-mail Address
Searches with an e-mail address as a keyword. Selecting [Enter/Change Keyword]
displays the screen for entering the keyword. Up to 128 characters are allowed.
Example: myhost@example.com
„Custom Item
This field is used to search with a keyword item other than the recipient name and email address. Selecting [Enter/Change Keyword] displays the screen listing the custom
items.
Note
z
• Only one custom item can be selected.
None
No custom item is used for the keyword search.
z
Telephone number
A telephone number is used for the keyword search.
z
Office
An office name is used for the keyword search.
z
Department
A department name is used for the keyword search.
z
Change Settings
Select a custom item, and select this button. Then the keyword entry screen
appears. Up to 60 characters are allowed.
„Enter/Change Keyword
Select a keyword item, and select [Enter/Change Keyword]. Then the keyword is set or
changed.
182
E-mail
„Search
The search starts. The searched results are listed on the screen.
New Recipients (Entering an Address)
You can enter addresses using the keyboard.
1
Select [New Recipients] on the [Email] screen.
2
Use the keyboard shown on the
screen to enter an e-mail address
of up to 128 characters.
„To/CC/BCC
Switches the recipient type (To/CC/BCC) using the drop-down menu.
„+Add
Scan
Allows you to specify e-mail addresses to send e-mails to multiple recipients
(Broadcast).
(Search for names)
„
5
Selecting this button to search for names.
„Backspace
Moves the cursor back to delete one character.
„Shift
Used for entering uppercase characters.
„More Characters
Displays symbols. Use this button to enter symbols for the e-mail address.
Add Me (Adding the Sender’s Address)
This button is used to add the sender's address to [To], [CC], or [BCC].
1
2
Select [Add Me].
Select an option.
„To
Adds the sender's address to To.
„CC
Adds the sender's address to CC.
„BCC
Adds the sender's address to BCC.
183
5 Scan
Recipient(s) (Editing a Recipient)
You can confirm, delete or edit recipients using the pop-up menu displayed.
1
From the [Recipient(s)] list, select
the recipient to be deleted,
confirmed, or edited.
2
Select any item from the pop-up
menu.
„Remove
Removes the selected recipient.
„Remove All
Removes all recipients in the list.
„Edit
Displays the [Change Recipient Settings] screen where you can confirm or edit the
recipient.
Scan
Refer to "[Edit Recipient] Screen" (P.184).
„Close Menu
5
Hides the pop-up menu.
[Edit Recipient] Screen
You can confirm and change the settings of the recipient.
1
2
Select the item to be changed.
Select [Change Settings].
„E-mail Address
To change the e-mail address, select [Change Settings] to display the keyboard and
enter a new address.
„Name
To change the recipient name, select [Change Settings] to display the keyboard and
enter a new name.
The recipient name appears when registered in the Address Book.
„S/MIME Certificate
To check whether or not any certificate is linked to the e-mail address, select [Change
Settings].
If S/MIME is enabled, and a certificate is linked to the e-mail address, you can check
the contents of the S/MIME certificate.
For information on S/MIME communication, refer to "12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" >
"Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" in the Administrator Guide.
„Change Settings
Displays the edit screen. You can change recipients, or confirm S/MIME certificates.
184
E-mail
From (Setting the Sender’s Address)
Specify a sender's e-mail address. You can specify only one address as a sender's
address.
Note
• When using the Authentication feature, the e-mail address registered in user information is
automatically set as a sender's address. For more information on user information, refer to
"5 Tools" > "Accounting" > "Create/View User Accounts" in the Administrator Guide.
• Depending on the settings in the Tools, [From] may not be editable.
• When using a digital signature, the machine e-mail address becomes the sender’s address.
For information on a digital signature, refer to "12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" >
"Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" in the Administrator Guide.
1
2
Select [From].
Select any item from the pop-up
menu.
„Address Book
Allows you to select the sender's e-mail address from the address book.
„Keyboard
5
Enter the sender’s e-mail address of up to 128 characters.
„Close Menu
Hides the pop-up menu.
Subject (Setting the Subject)
Set the e-mail subject using the following procedure.
„Auto Set
Automatically sets the subject to [Scan data from XXX] (where XXX is the host name
of the machine).
„To set a user-defined subject
1
2
Scan
For information on the address book, refer to "Address Book (Specifying a Destination PC Using the
Address Book)" (P.189).
Select [Subject].
Enter a subject of up to 128 characters using the displayed keyboard.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
185
5 Scan
Message (Entering the E-mail Body)
Enter the e-mail body using the following procedure.
1
2
Select [Message].
Enter a message of up to 256 characters using the keyboard.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
Scan
5
186
Scan to Mailbox
Scan to Mailbox
The following describes the procedure to select features on the [Scan to Mailbox]
screen. You can scan documents and save the scanned data into a mailbox of the
machine. The following explains the General Settings screen on the [Scan to Mailbox]
Screen.
A mailbox needs to be registered beforehand. For more information on registering a mailbox, refer to "5
Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Create Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.
1
Select [Scan to Mailbox] on the [All
Services] screen.
2
Select a feature on the [Scan to
Mailbox] screen.
Note
• If a passcode is set for the
mailbox, the passcode entry
screen may appear. Enter the passcode and select [Enter]. If you have forgotten the
passcode, set the mailbox passcode in the System Administration mode again.
„Mailbox
Note
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen and select [
Scan
Select a mailbox to save the scanned data in.
] to move to the next screen.
5
„Go to
Use the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit mailbox number. The mailbox then appears
at the top of the list.
„Document List
Select a mailbox and then select this button to display the [Document List] screen. You
can confirm or delete documents stored in the mailbox.
For more information on the [Document List] screen, refer to "Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox
Documents" (P.218).
187
5 Scan
Network Scanning
The following describes the procedure to select features on the Network Scanning
screen. On the Network Scanning screen, you can scan documents after specifying a
file (job template) saving scanning conditions, information on the forwarding destination
server and others.
This feature creates job templates on a computer using CentreWare Internet Services.
Scanned data is converted to the format specified in a job template, and is
automatically sent to a server. The machine allows you to automatically retrieve job
templates stored in a server. The following explains the [General Settings] screen on
the Network Scanning screen.
Note
• If characters not supported by the machine are used in names or description of job flow
sheets, the characters will not be displayed or will be garbled on the screen. For information
on characters available for use, refer to "15 Appendix" > "Notes and Restrictions" > "Notes
and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine" in the Administrator Guide.
When Scan to Home is enabled, and when the Access Remote feature is available, the
scanned document can be transferred to a different destination based on an
authenticated user.
Scan
Important • When using the Scan to Home feature in computer environment earlier than Windows NT a
destination user name in the earlier format (domain name\user name) will not be determined
automatically.
Before scanning, change the user name with which you can log in correctly.
Note
5
• You can configure Scan to Home from CentreWare Internet Services.
For information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services, refer to the online help of CentreWare
Internet Services.
1
Select [Network Scanning] on the
[All Services] screen.
2
Select a job template.
„Job Template
Select a job template that has the scan conditions you want.
Note
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
„Go to
Use the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit job template number. The job template then
appears at the top of the list.
„Template Description
Displays the [Template Description] screen. The screen displays the description of the
job template. This applies only when the description has been added to a job template.
„Update Template
Refreshes the information. If a created job template has not been displayed, selecting
[Update Template] will display the job template.
188
Scan to PC
Scan to PC
You can convert scanned data to TIFF, JPEG, PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS format, and
then use the FTP or SMB protocol to send the data to a computer on the network. The
following shows the reference section for each feature.
Transfer Protocol...................................................................................................................... 189
Address Book (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Address Book).................................. 189
Browse... (Specifying a Destination PC by Browsing Your Network).................................... 190
Specifying a Destination (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Screen Keyboard) ............ 190
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• Before scanning, a shared folder must be created on the computer for saving scanned data.
If the FTP protocol is used, the FTP service must be set. For information on the computer
settings, refer to the documentation supplied with your operating system. For information on
compatible operating systems, refer to "15 Appendix" > "Specifications" > "Scan Function" in
the Administrator Guide.
1
Select [Scan to PC] from the [All
Services] screen.
2
Specify a forwarding destination on
the [Scan to PC] screen.
Scan
Note
5
• Fields displayed vary
depending on the protocol.
Transfer Protocol
You can select a transfer protocol using the following procedure.
1
2
Select [Transfer Protocol].
Select any item.
„FTP
Transfers using the FTP protocol.
„SMB
Transfers using the SMB protocol.
„SMB (UNC Format)
Transfers using the SMB protocol (UNC Format).
UNC stands for Universal Naming Convention and its format is as follows:
\\host name\shared name\directory name
Address Book (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Address Book)
You can specify the server name, user name and other information from the address
book.
For information on settings of the address book, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Add
Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
189
5 Scan
To verify invalidation of a certificate, prior settings are required. For the settings, refer to "5 Tools" >
"Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Security Settings" > "Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings" in
the Administrator Guide.
Note
• While displaying the Address Book, if a message indicating "Validating..." appears on the
screen, you can not start a scan job until the message disappears.
1
2
Select [Address Book].
3
Select [Add].
Select the destination in which data
is to be stored.
Important • You can only use destinations
configured for SMB or FTP. You cannot use destinations for fax, e-mails or Internet Fax.
Note
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen and select [
] to move to the next screen.
„Name/Protocol
Lists recipient names and protocols.
„Add
Scan
Adds a selected recipient to the [Save In] box.
„Save in
Displays a selected recipient.
5
„Details
You can confirm information such as [Name] and [Server Name/IP Address].
Browse... (Specifying a Destination PC by Browsing Your Network)
Displays a hierarchy consisting of server names and folders. You can specify a save
destination by tracing the hierarchy.
1
2
Select [Browse...].
Select the destination in which data
is to be stored.
You can move to another level by
pressing [Previous] or [Next].
Important • You can specify recipients for SMB only.
„Save in:
Shows the current location in the hierarchy.
Specifying a Destination (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Screen
Keyboard)
Enter information into the fields provided for the selected protocol, to specify a
forwarding destination.
190
Scan to PC
1
Select the item to be set.
Note
2
• You can also select [Address
Book] to enter information.
• Fields displayed on the screen
vary depending on the
protocol.
Enter information using the
keyboard on the screen.
For information on how to enter
characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
Note
• To delete characters, select
[Backspace].
„Server
Displayed when [FTP] or [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol]. Enter a server name
or IP address. Up to 64 characters are allowed.
Example:myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
Displayed when [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol]. Enter a shared name. Up to
64 characters are allowed.
5
„Save In
z
Displayed when [FTP] or [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol]:
Enter a directory name. Up to 128 characters are allowed.
z
When [SMB(UNC format) is selected for [Transfer Protocol]:
Enter "\\Host Name\Shared Name\Directory Name". Up to 260 characters are
allowed.
„User Name
Enter the user name of the computer you are forwarding to. When a user name is not
required for the destination, this field can be skipped.
When [FTP] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], up to 97 characters are allowed.
When [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], use one of the following formats.
z
For Active Directory:
User name@Domain name (user name: up to 32 characters, domain name: up to 64
characters)
Example: fuji@example.com (fuji: user name, example.com: domain name)
z
For Windows NT Domain:
Domain name\User name (domain name: up to 64 characters, user name: up to 32
characters)
Example: example\fuji (example: domain name, fuji: user name)
z
Scan
„Shared Name
For workgroups:
Local user (up to 32 characters)
Example: Fuji-Taro
„Password
Enter the password for the user name. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
191
5 Scan
General Settings
The [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], and [Scan to PC] screens allow
you to set basic features. The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Color Scanning (Selecting the Color To Scan).........................................................................192
2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document).........................................................193
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).........................................................................194
File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data) ............................................................194
Note
• When you select [Scan to Mailbox], [File Format] is disabled.
1
On the [All Services] screen, select
[E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox],
[Network Scanning] or [Scan to
PC].
2
On the [E-mail]/[Scan to Mailbox]/[Network Scanning]/[Scan to PC] screen, select a
feature.
Scan
5
Color Scanning (Selecting the Color To Scan)
You can set the output color to scan a document.
1
Select the scanning color from
[Color Scanning].
„Auto Detect
The color of the document is determined automatically; the machine scans in full color
when the document is colored, otherwise scans in monochrome.
Note
• The features which can be set in the [Advanced Settings] screen when [Auto Detect] is
selected, are the same as if [Color] is specified for the [Color Scanning] when a color
document is loaded, or the same as if [Black & White] is specified for the [Color Scanning]
when a monochrome document is loaded.
„Color
Select to scan a color document.
„Black & White
Scans a document in monochrome 2 tone. You can select the document type in the
[Original Type].
„Grayscale
Scans a document in grayscale. Adds shades to monochrome, creating intermediate
tones that change gradually. Suited to documents containing gradations that cannot be
reproduced with monochrome (black and white).
192
General Settings
2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)
Allows you to scan a 1-sided or 2-sided document.
By setting the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.
1
Select any item.
„1 Sided
Select this to scan only one side of the document.
„2 Sided (H to H)
Select this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in the same orientation.
„2 Sided (H to T)
Select this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in opposite orientations.
Scan
„More...
The [2 Sided Scanning] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[2 Sided Scanning] Screen" (P.193).
5
[2 Sided Scanning] Screen
This screen allows you to select the status and orientation of original documents.
1
Select any item.
„1 Sided
Select this to scan only one side of the document.
„2 Sided
Select this to scan both sides of the document.
„Originals
Displayed when [2 Sided] is selected.
z
Head to Head
Select this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in the same orientation.
z
Head to Toe
Select this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in opposite orientations.
„Original Orientation
To scan using the document feeder, the orientation must be set to specify the head of
the document.
Load the document in the [Sideways Images] orientation when [File Format] is set to
[TIFF/JPEG Auto Select], [TIFF], or [JPEG]. When viewing the scanned document on
a computer, the document is displayed in the [Upright Images] orientation.
193
5 Scan
Note
z
• If the setting for [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the
machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.
Upright Images
Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of
the document glass or document feeder.
z
Sideways Images
Select this when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the
document glass or the document feeder.
Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)
When you set [Color Scanning] to [Black & White], select the document type.
1
Select an original type.
Scan
„Photo & Text
Select this item when the scanning document contains both text and photos. This
setting automatically identifies text and photo areas to scan each area with optimum
quality.
5
„Text
Select this item when scanning text clearly.
„Photo
Select this item when scanning photos.
Note
• [Photo] cannot be selected when [Searchable Text] on the [File Format] screen is set to
[Searchable].
File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)
You can select a file format for output data.
Note
1
• When [Scan to Mailbox] is selected, [File Format] is disabled.
Select a file format.
„TIFF/JPEG Auto
Automatically selects JPEG or TIFF. The file format is determined for each page:
[JPEG] for full-color and grayscale pages, and [TIFF] for monochrome pages.
„PDF
Saves scanned data in PDF format.
Note
194
• The version of the output PDF files is Adobe®Acrobat® 4.0 (PDF 1.3).
General Settings
„DocuWorks
Saves scanned data in DocuWorks format.
Note
• To browse or print DocuWorks files on a computer, one of the following software is required.
- DocuWorks 4.0 or later
- DocuWorks Viewer Light 4.0 or later
- DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 4.0 or later
„mTIFF
Saves scanned data in multi-page TIFF format.
„More...
The [File Format] screen is displayed.
Refer to "[File Format] Screen" (P.195).
[File Format] Screen
This screen displays all available File Format options.
1
Select any item.
Scan
5
„TIFF/JPEG Auto Select
Automatically selects JPEG or TIFF. The file format is determined for each page:
[JPEG] for full-color and grayscale pages, and [TIFF] for monochrome pages.
„mTIFF - Multiple Page per File
Saves multiple pages into a single file in TIFF format.
„TIFF - File for Each Page
Saves each page into a different file in TIFF format.
„JPEG - File for Each Page
Saves as a JPEG file. When either [Color] or [Grayscale] is selected for [Color
Scanning], configure the image compression method. You can also configure the
compression ratio with [Quality/File Size] in the [Output Format] screen.
„PDF - Multiple Pages per File
Saves scanned data in PDF format.
Note
• The Version of the output PDF files is Adobe®Acrobat® 4.0 (PDF 1.3).
„DocuWorks
Saves scanned data in DocuWorks format.
Note
• To browse or print DocuWorks files on a computer, one of the following software is required.
- DocuWorks 4.0 or later
- DocuWorks Viewer Light 4.0 or later
- DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 4.0 or later
„XPS
Saves scanned data in XPS format.
195
5 Scan
„Compression Method
Allows you to select a compression method for scanned image data.
Note
• Some models require an optional kit to use this feature. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
• To browse or print DocuWorks files on a computer, one of the following software is required.
- DocuWorks 6.0 or later
- DocuWorks Viewer Light 5.1 or later
- DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 5.1 or later
„Searchable Text
Select whether to perform character recognition in PDF and DocuWorks files.
The following scan settings can be used when [Searchable Text] is set to [Searchable].
Scan Settings
Color Scanning
Black & White
Original Type
Photo & Text, Text
File Format
PDF, DocuWorks
Advanced Settings
Color Space*1
Standard Color Space
Layout Adjustment
Resolution
200 dpi, 300 dpi
Reduce/Enlarge
100%
General Settings
Scan
5
Available Value
*1: [Color Space] may not appear depending on the System Administrator settings.
For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Scan Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Color Space"
in the Administrator Guide.
Important • Note the following when [Searchable Text] is set to [Searchable].
• When the text on the document is small (10 points or smaller), scan the document with high
resolution (300 dpi).
• Color scanning is recommended when the document has outlined white text, or when it has
text placed on a dark background.
• In the following cases, the Searchable Text feature may not function properly.
- If the document is not loaded correctly and thus the text is slanted, or if the text on the
document is in different orientations
- If the text on the document is decorated (italic, hatching, strike-through, etc.)
- If the document has background patterns or noise
- If the text on the document is handwritten
Note
• Some models require an optional kit to use this feature. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
„PDF Security
Allows you to prevent the data saved as a PDF file from unauthorized access.
The [File Format - PDF Security] screen appears.
Refer to "[File Format - PDF Security] Screen" (P.197).
„PDF Signature
The [File Format - PDF Signature] screen appears.
A digital signature added to a file enables to detect alterations in the file, or to prevent
impersonation of the sender.
To verify the signature with Adobe Acrobat, select [Digital Signatures] under
[Preferences] on Acrobat, and then select the following option for [Signing Method].
- Acrobat 6.0.x : Windows Digital Certificate Security
- Acrobat 7.0.x or later : Adobe Default Security
196
General Settings
z
Off
No visible signature is added.
z
Visible Signature
Adds a visible signature using the certificate of the machine.
z
Invisible Signature
Adds an invisible digital signature using the certificate of the machine.
z
Signature Field Location
Select the position for [Visible Signature] where the signature is displayed.
„Optimize PDF For Web View
Optimizes the PDF file so that it is displayed faster on a web browser when opening the
PDF file while downloading it.
„DocuWorks Security
Allows you to configure security on the data saved as a DocuWorks file to prevent
unauthorized access.
The [File Format - DocuWorks Security] screen appears.
Scan
Refer to "[File Format - DocuWorks Security] Screen" (P.199).
„DocuWorks Signature
5
The [File Format - DocuWorks Signature] screen appears.
A visible signature added to a file enables to detect alterations in the file, or prevent
impersonation of the sender.
z
Off
No visible signature is added.
z
On
Adds a visible signature using the certificate of the machine.
z
Signature Field Location
Select the position where the signature is displayed.
„XPS Signature
The [File Format - XPS Signature] screen appears.
A visible signature added to a file enables to detect alterations in the file, or prevent
impersonation of the sender.
z
Off
No visible signature is added.
z
On
Adds a visible signature using the certificate of the machine.
[File Format - PDF Security] Screen
Allows you to encrypt a PDF file by password, and assign the access privileges for the
file operation.
197
5 Scan
1
Select any item.
„Off
The file is not encrypted, and no access privilege is configured.
„Password
Encrypts the file using a password.
„Encryption Algorithm
Set the encryption method.
z
128-bit RC4
Encrypts by the 128-bit RC4 method. Files encrypted by this method can be opened
with Adobe® Acrobat® 5.0 or later.
Important • When encrypted by the 128-bit RC4 method, and [PDF Signature] is selected, files can be
opened only with Adobe® Acrobat® 6.0 or later.
Scan
z
128-bit AES
Encrypts by the 128-bit AES method. Files encrypted by this method can be opened
with Adobe® Acrobat® 7.0 or later.
5
„Supported Version
The supported versions of Adobe® Acrobat® for encryption are displayed.
„Doc. Open Password
The [PDF Security - Document Open Password] screen appears.
If you select [On] and set a password, the password is required to open the file.
You can enter a password up to 32 characters.
„Permissions
The [PDF Security - Permissions] screen appears.
Refer to "[PDF Security - Permissions] Screen" (P.198).
[PDF Security - Permissions] Screen
Allows you to assign access privileges to a file.
1
2
3
Select [Security Password].
4
5
Likewise, reenter the security password, and select [Save].
Select [On].
Select [Keyboard], enter the
security password, and select
[Save].
Select any item
„Security Password
The [PDF Security - Security Password] screen appears.
198
General Settings
Security Password allows to assign access privileges to files. The password is required
when changing the access privileges or performing unauthorized operations.
You can enter a password up to 32 characters.
„Printing
The [Authorization - Printing] screen appears.
Configure whether to allow printing the file. If allowed, select the print resolution as well.
„Changes Allowed
The [Authorization - Changes Allowed] screen appears.
Configure whether to allow changing the file contents such as inserting pages or adding
notes.
„Allow Contents Copying and Extraction
The [Authorization - Allow Contents Copying and Extraction] screen appears.
Configure whether to allow copying the file contents such as text and images.
„Text Editing by Screen Reader
Scan
The [Text Editing by Screen Reader] screen appears.
Configure whether to allow using application software that reads out displayed
documents for the visually handicapped.
5
[File Format - DocuWorks Security] Screen
Allows you to encrypt a Docuworks file with a password, and assign the access
privileges for the file operation.
1
Select any item.
„Off
The file is not encrypted, and no access privilege is configured.
„Password (V4 Compatible)
Encrypts the file by the 56 bit DES method using a password. Files encrypted by this
method can be opened with DocuWorks Ver4.0 or later.
Select [Open Password], and set a password.
„Password (V4 Incompatible)
Encrypts the file by the 128 bit AES method using password. Files encrypted by this
method can be opened with DocuWorks Ver5.0 or later.
Select [Open Password], and set a password.
„Digital Certificate (V4 Incompatible)
Encrypts the file by the 128 bit AES method using certificate. Files encrypted by this
method can be opened with DocuWorks Ver.5.0 or later.
Select [Certificate] to set a certificate.
Important • If you encrypt a file using a certificate without Basic Constraints, DocuWorks Ver.5.0.1 and
Ver.6.0.1 cannot open the file. To use such certificates, use DocuWorks Ver.5.0.2, or
Ver.6.0.2 or later.
199
5 Scan
„Encryption Algorithm
Displays the encryption methods.
„Restricted Operations
Select file operations to whom access privileges are assigned. When assigning access
privileges, configure [Full Access Password].
„Open Password
The [DocuWorks Security - Open Password] screen appears.
If you select [On] and set a password, the file is encrypted. To open the file, the
password is required. The access privileges set in [Restricted Operations] are
assigned.
You can enter a password up to 32 characters.
„Full Access Password
The [DocuWorks Security - Full Access Password] screen appears.
When setting a password, the password is required to change the access privileges set
in [Restricted Operations].
Scan
You can enter a password up to 32 characters.
„Certificate
The [DocuWorks Security - Certificate] screen appears.
5
Refer to "[DocuWorks Security - Certificate] Screen" (P.200).
[DocuWorks Security - Certificate] Screen
Select a certificate added to the file.
„Remove
Deletes the selected certificates
from the list.
„Edit
Displays the [Change Settings]
screen.
You can change the access privileges and confirm the certificate information.
z
Access Right
Allows you to change the access right to open or operate files.
z
Certificate Details
The [Certificate Details] screen appears.
Certificate information including issuer, expiration date, persons to whom the
certificate is issued, and the like is displayed.
„Close Menu
Closes the pop-up menu.
„Delete All
Deletes all settings of the certificate.
200
General Settings
„Add Device Certificate
If a valid certificate is linked to the machine, the machine certificate is added to the
certificate list.
„Add from Address Book
The [DocuWorks Security - Address Book] screen appears.
Refer to "[DocuWorks Security - Address Book] Screen" (P.201).
[DocuWorks Security - Address Book] Screen
Allows you to select parties to whom the encrypted file is disclosed, and address to
whom privileges are assigned.
„Open Document
Displayed only when [Local Address List] is selected.
Configure certificates of persons who are allowed to open the file.
„Full Access
Displayed only when [Local Address List] is selected.
Scan
Configure certificates of persons who are allowed to change access privileges
including editing or operating the file (full access).
„Go to
5
Displayed only when [Local Address List] is selected.
Enter a recipient number using the numeric keypad to display the recipient on the list.
„Certificate Details
The [Certificate Details] screen appears.
Certificate information including issuer, expiration date, persons to whom the certificate
is issued, and the like is displayed.
„List all public entries
Displays the local address list.
For information on Local Search, refer to "When [List all public entries] is Selected"
(P.182)“.
„Search Pubic
Searches recipients in the local address list.
For information on Local Search, refer to "When [Search Public] or [Search Network] is
Selected" (P.182).
„Search Network
For information on Remote Search, refer to "When [Search Public] or [Search Network]
is Selected" (P.182). For information on Directory Service, refer to "5 Tools" >
"Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Remote Authentication / Directory Service Settings"
> "LDAP Server/Directory Service" in the Administrator Guide.
201
5 Scan
Advanced Settings
On the [Advanced Settings] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network
Scanning], or [Scan to PC], you can set the image quality features. The following shows
the reference section for each feature.
Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph)............................................................................202
Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness) ..............................................202
Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting Contrast) ......203
Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)..............................................203
Color Space (Specifying Color Space) .....................................................................................204
On the [All Services] screen, select
[E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox],
[Network Scanning] or [Scan to
PC].
2
Select the [Advanced Settings] tab,
and select a feature on the
[Advanced Settings] screen.
Scan
1
Note
5
• [Color Space] is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• A setting must be made in the System Administration mode to activate [Color Space]. For
information on the setting procedure, refer to "Color Space (Specifying Color Space)"
(P.204) and "5 Tools" > "Scan Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Color Space" in the
Administrator Guide.
Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph)
Configure when scanning a color photograph.
This feature is only available when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color].
Important • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.
• When this feature is enabled, the [Shadow Suppression] and [Background Suppression]
features cannot be used.
1
2
Select [Photographs].
Select [Enhance Photographs].
Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness)
You can adjust the scan density and image sharpness.
1
2
202
Select [Image Options].
Adjust the scan density and
sharpness with [ ] and [ ].
Advanced Settings
„Lighten/Darken
You can select a scan density level from among 7 levels between [Lighten] and
[Darken].
Moving the arrow mark to the upper position makes the scan density lighter, and
moving to the lower position makes darker.
„Sharpness
You can select a sharpness level from 5 levels between [Soften] and [Sharpen].
Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the contours of images sharper, and selecting
a lower cell makes softer.
Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/
Adjusting Contrast)
This feature allows you to suppress the background color of a document such as
newspaper and colored paper. In addition, when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or
[Grayscale], you can adjust the contrast.
Select [Image Enhancement].
Scan
1
2
Select [Background Suppression]
and [Contrast]. Adjust contrast with
[ ] and [ ].
5
„Background Suppression
z
No Suppression
Scans the document backgrounds with no filtering.
z
Auto Suppression
When [Color Scanning] is set to [Black & White], the background of a document
printed on colored paper, such as newspaper, will be suppressed.
When [Color Scanning] is set to [Color], the background of a document printed on
white-color paper will be suppressed.
„Contrast
You can select a contrast level from 5 levels between [Least Contrast] and [Most
Contrast].
Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas
greater; light areas become lighter and dark areas darker. In contrast, selecting a lower
cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas smaller.
Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)
When you scan a 2-sided document printed on thin paper, this feature allows you to
suppress the image and colors on the reverse side of each document page from
appearing in the scan image.
This feature is enabled only when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale].
Important • This feature cannot be used with [Photographs].
203
5 Scan
1
2
Select [Shadow Suppression].
Select [Auto Suppression].
Color Space (Specifying Color Space)
This feature allows you to set the color space.
Important • Color Space is available when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color].
Note
1
2
• To display [Color Space] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen, a setting must be made in the
System Administration mode. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Scan Service
Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Color Space" in the Administrator Guide.
Select [Color Space].
Select either [Standard Color
Space] or [Device Color Space].
Scan
„sRGB
Uses the color space that conforms to sYCC.
5
„Device Color Space
Uses advanced color settings.
Note
• You can find profile data in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.
• When [Device Color Space] is selected, the image quality features described below are
changed to their defaults.
Lighten/Darken, Sharpness, Shadow Suppression, Contrast, Background Suppression
• When [Color Scanning] is set to [Auto Detect], [Standard Color Space] is applied to color
pages of the documents.
204
Layout Adjustment
Layout Adjustment
On the [Layout Adjustment] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network
Scanning], or [Scan to PC], you can adjust the scan options. The following shows the
reference section for each feature.
Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)....................................................................... 205
2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ........................................................ 205
Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages on Separate Sheets) ................................................. 206
Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size) .................................................................................... 207
Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ...................... 207
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) ...................................... 208
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio) ....................................................................... 209
On the [All Services] screen, select
[E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox],
[Network Scanning], or [Scan to
PC].
2
Select the [Layout Adjustment] tab,
and then select a feature on the
[Layout Adjustment] screen.
Scan
1
5
Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)
This feature allows you to set the resolution to scan a document.
As the value increases, the scan becomes more detailed, but the data size also
increases. The scanning and transfer time increases as well.
1
2
Select [Resolution].
Select a resolution.
Note
• Select from [200 dpi] or [300
dpi] when [Searchable Text] is
set to [Searchable] for PDF or
DocuWorks files on the [File
Format] screen.
2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)
This feature is the same as [2 Sided Scanning] in the [E-mail]/[Scan to Mailbox]/[Network Scanning]/
[Scan to PC] tab. Refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.193).
205
5 Scan
Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages on Separate Sheets)
This feature allows you to scan facing pages of a document onto separate sheets of
paper in page order.
This feature is useful if you need to make separate scans for facing pages of bound
originals such as a booklet.
Note
• You cannot use the document feeder with this feature. Use the document glass.
• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.
1
2
Select [Book Scanning].
Select any item.
„Off
Does not scan as a bound document.
„Left Page then Right
Scan
Scans the left page and then the right page of facing pages.
„Right Page then Left
5
Scans the right page and then the left page of facing pages.
„Top Page then Bottom
Scans the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages.
„Both Pages
Scans both pages in page order.
„Left Page Only
Scans the left page only in page order. You can select this item when [Left Page then
Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.
„Right Page Only
Scans the right page only in page order. You can select this item when [Left Page then
Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.
„Top Page Only
Scans the top page only in page order. You can select this item when [Top Page then
Bottom] is selected.
„Bottom Page Only
Scans the bottom page only in page order. You can select this item when [Top Page
then Bottom] is selected.
„Binding Edge Erase
Erases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding
erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
206
Layout Adjustment
Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size)
This feature allows you to set the scan size for a document.
Use this feature when a document is a non-standard size, or when you want to scan a
document at a size different from the original size.
1
Select [Original Size] on the
[Layout Adjustment] screen.
2
Select a size.
If you select a non-standard size,
specify values for the X and Y
directions.
„Auto Detect
Detects the document size automatically. Automatically-detectable sizes are:
Document feeder
B5, B5 , B4, A5 , A4, A4 , A3,
8.5 x 11 inches, 8.5 x 11 inches ,
11 x 17 inches
B6, B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5, A5 ,
A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11 inches
Important • If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size
appears.
Note
• The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size
Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings,
refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in
the Administrator Guide.
„Standard Size
Select from preset sizes.
„Variable Size
Enter the desired scan size when scanning a non-standard size document or when
scanning at a size different from the original document size. You can specify a value in
the range of 15 to 432 mm for the scan length (X), and a value in the range of 15 to 297
mm for the scan width (Y), in 1 mm increments. The scales attached on the upper and
left edges of the document glass are helpful for you to specify values.
Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents
Simultaneously)
When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously scan different size
documents with the respective sizes. You can also specify a size to scan different size
documents with the same size.
Important • When selecting [Color] for [Color Scanning], and [2 Sided] for [2 Sided Scanning], set the
[Resolution] to a maximum of [600dpi].
• Always load the A5-size documents in portrait orientation.
• When loading B5 documents together with A3 documents loaded in landscape orientation or
A4 documents loaded in portrait orientation, load the B5 documents in portrait orientation.
• When upper-left corners of the documents are not aligned properly, they may not be
scanned correctly.
207
Scan
Document size
Document glass
5
5 Scan
• The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5
portrait and B4 landscape. If another combination of document sizes is used, the documents
can be fed at an angle and may not be copied properly.
Note
• When [Reduce/Enlarge] is set to [Auto %] and the output size is specified for [Output Size],
the scanned data is automatically reduced/enlarged to the specified size. However, since
the scanned image is not rotated, the image will be reduced/enlarged to fit the specified size
while keeping its orientation. For example, when an A3 landscape original is loaded and the
output size is set to A4 portrait, the scanned image is reduced to A5 landscape and printed
on A4 portrait paper.
• If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size
appears.
1
2
Select [Mixed Sized Originals].
Select [On].
„Off
Select this item when all documents are of the same size.
Scan
„On
When scanning documents of different sizes, the machine automatically detects the
size of each document.
5
Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document)
When you scan a document with the document cover open or when you scan a book,
the edges and center margin of the document may be scanned as black shadows. The
Edge Erase feature allows you to erase such shadows.
Note
• For 2-sided originals, the same edge erase amounts are set for the front and back sides.
• If you set [Reduce/Enlarge], the edge erase amounts will be reduced or enlarged in
proportion to the ratio you configured.
1
2
Select [Edge Erase].
3
Use [ ] and [ ] to set the erase
widths of top and bottom, left and
right, and center of the document.
4
Select [Original Orientation].
Select [All Edges] or [Parallel
Edges].
„All Edges
Sets the Edge Erase amounts to 2 mm for the top and bottom, and left and right edges.
If you do not want to erase edges, select [Parallel Edges] and then specify 0 mm for
the required edges.
„Parallel Edges
Allows you to specify Edge Erase values.
208
Layout Adjustment
z
Top & Bottom
Erases the shadows of top and bottom edges of the document in accordance with
the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the
range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
z
Left & Right
Erases the shadows of left and right edges of the document in accordance with the
orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the
range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
z
Center
Erases the shadow in the center of facing pages of a bound document. You can set
the center erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
„Original Orientation
In order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the document must be
configured. When the scanned document which was loaded [Sideway Images] is
viewed on a computer, the document is displayed in the [Upright Images] orientation.
Note
Upright Images
Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of
the document glass or document feeder.
z
Sideways Images
Select this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of
the document glass or document feeder.
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)
This feature allows you to set the scanning ratio for the document to be scanned.
Note
1
2
• When [Searchable Text] on the [File Format] screen is set to [Searchable], [Reduce/Enlarge]
is 100%.
Select [Reduce/Enlarge].
Select or enter a ratio.
„Proportional % / Variable %
Select a preset ratio, or enter a value within the range of 25 to 400% in 1% increments.
To enter a value, touch the entry box, and then use the numeric keypad or the [ ] and
[ ] buttons.
You can change settings to display scanning ratios other than [100%]. For information on how to set,
refer to "5 Tools" > "Scan Service Settings" > "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" in the Administrator Guide.
209
Scan
z
• If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine
may mistakenly detect the top of the document.
5
5 Scan
„Enter Output Size
In [Output Size], select the output
size of the scanned document. The
machine automatically calculates
the scanning ratio based on the
selected output size and the original
document size.
Note
• Selecting [Auto %] may generate blank margin areas.
„100 %
Scans at the same image size as the original document.
„Proportional %
Selects from preset ratios.
Scan
5
210
E-mail Options/Filing Options
E-mail Options/Filing Options
On the [E-mail Options]/[Filing Options] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox],
[Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC], you can configure the output formats. For more
information, refer to below.
Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning)........................ 211
Read Receipts (Specifying Read Receipts) .............................................................................. 212
Split Send (Sending in Sections).............................................................................................. 212
File Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Sent) ........................................................... 213
Reply To (Specifying a Reply Address) .................................................................................. 213
File Name Conflict (Setting the Action to be Taken for File Name Conflict)......................... 214
Document Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Saved) .............................................. 214
Encryption (Sending E-mail Encrypted by S/MIME).............................................................. 214
Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME) .............................. 215
Login Name.............................................................................................................................. 215
Password................................................................................................................................... 215
Meta Data ................................................................................................................................. 215
2
Scan
1
On the [All Services] screen, select
[E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox],
[Network Scanning], or [Scan to
PC].
5
Select the [E-mail Options]/[Filing
Options] tab, and then select a
feature on the [E-mail Options]/
[Filing Options] screen.
Note
• The buttons displayed on the
screen depend on the scan
service selected on the [All
Services] screen. The screen
on the right is for the [E-mail] feature.
Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When
Scanning)
This feature allows you to select an image compression level. The setting is effective
when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale].
1
2
Select [Quality/File Size].
Adjust Quality/File Size with [
and [ ].
]
„Small File Size
The image is saved with high compression. Image quality degrades, but the file size
decreases.
„Large File Size
The image is saved with low compression. Image quality improves, but the file size
increases.
211
5 Scan
Read Receipts (Specifying Read Receipts)
This feature allows you to receive read receipts from e-mail recipients when using the
[E-mail] feature. This feature is not available unless recipients support the MDN
feature.
Note
• This feature is displayed only when [Tools] > [System Settings] > [E-mail/Internet Fax
Settings] > [E-mail Control] > [Read Receipts] is set to [On].
• When multiple e-mails are sent using [Split Send], then a read receipt is requested for each
e-mail.
• Read receipts are returned to the address specified in [Reply To], or they are returned to the
address specified in [From] if [Reply To] is not set.
• This feature is only available when the recipient also sets to return read receipts.
1
2
Select [Read Receipts].
Select [On].
„Off
Scan
Select this item when you do not request read receipts.
„On
5
Select this when you request read receipts.
Split Send (Sending in Sections)
When using the [E-mail] feature and the size of the data to be attached is large, you
can split the data at page breaks or by a certain data size and then send the data.
For information about the Split Send setting, refer to "5 Tools" > "E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings"
> "E-mail Control" > "Split Send Method", "Maximum Data Size per E-mail", "Maximum Total Data
Size", and "Maximum Split Count" in the Administrator Guide.
1
2
Select [Split Send].
Select any item.
„Split by Page
The data is split at page breaks.
„Split by Data Size
The data is split by a certain data size.
212
E-mail Options/Filing Options
File Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Sent)
When using the [E-mail] or [Scan to Mailbox] feature, you can specify a name for the
document to be sent.
„Auto Set
The file name is "img-xxx-yyy.zzz" (where xxx is the date and time, yyy is the page
number, and zzz is the extension).
The extension depends on the setting in [File Format].
z
When [Multi-page TIFF] or [TIFF] is set for [File Format]: tif
z
When [PDF] is set for [File Format]: pdf
z
When [XPS] is set for [File Format]: xps
z
When [DocuWorks] is set for [File Format]: xdw
„To set the file name
1
2
Select [File Name].
Enter a name of up to 128 characters using the displayed keyboard.
Scan
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
Note
• When each page is saved as one file, the page number is added to the end of each file
name.
5
Reply To (Specifying a Reply Address)
When using the [E-mail] feature, you can specify the address for reply.
1
2
Select [Reply To].
Enter an address for reply.
„[Reply To] box
Touching the [Reply To] box displays the keyboard screen allowing you to enter a reply
address.
„Clear Field
Deletes the address entered in [Reply To].
„Reply To Me
Uses the address specified in [From] as a reply address.
Note
• This button is enabled only when an address is set for [From] on the [E-mail] screen.
„Address Book
Allows you to select a reply address from the Address Book.
Refer to "Address Book (Specifying an E-mail Address)" (P.180).
Note
• When using a job template, the template name becomes a file name, which cannot be
changed.
213
5 Scan
File Name Conflict (Setting the Action to be Taken for File Name Conflict)
When using the [Scan to PC] feature, you can set the action to be taken when the file
name conflicts with another file stored in the destination.
1
2
Select [File Name Conflict].
Select any item.
„Do Not Save
The job is cancelled and the file is not saved.
„Rename New File
The file name is automatically changed and saved. The machine adds a number (0001
- 9999) to the end of the file name.
„Overwrite Existing File
The existing file is replaced with the new one.
Scan
5
Document Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Saved)
When using the [Scan to Mailbox] feature, you can specify a name for the document to
be saved.
„Auto Set
The file name is "img-xxx" (where xxx is the date and time).
„To set the file name
1
2
Select [Document Name].
Enter a name of up to 28 characters using the displayed keyboard.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
Encryption (Sending E-mail Encrypted by S/MIME)
When using the [E-mail] feature, you can send e-mail encrypted by S/MIME.
When sending encrypted e-mail, select an e-mail address associated with a valid
certificate from Address Book.
„Off
Sends e-mail without encryption.
„On
Sends e-mail with encryption.
214
E-mail Options/Filing Options
Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME)
When using the [E-mail] feature, you can send e-mail with a digital signature
by S/MIME.
Digital Signature allows a recipient to confirm whether contents of the e-mail are
changed, or whether the e-mail is sent from the proper sender.
To use this feature, the machine's mail address must be linked to a certificate.
For information on how to link a certificate to the e-mail address, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup &
Calibration" > "Add Address Book Entry" > "S/MIME Certificate" in the Administrator Guide.
„Off
Sends e-mail without a digital signature.
„On
Sends e-mail with a digital signature.
Login Name
Note
1
2
Scan
Use this feature to enter the login name for a destination server.
• This feature is displayed only when [Network Scanning] is selected on the [All Services]
screen.
5
Select [Login Name].
Enter the login name using the keyboard displayed on the screen.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
Password
Use this feature to enter the password for a destination server.
Note
1
2
• This feature is displayed only when [Network Scanning] is selected on the [All Services]
screen.
Select [Password].
Enter the password using the keyboard displayed on the screen.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
Meta Data
Use this feature to change the values of the Document Management Field (DMF) if they
are specified for a selected job template.
Note
• This feature is displayed only when [Network Scanning] is selected on the [All Services]
screen.
215
6 Send from Mailbox
This chapter describes the basic mailbox operation and mailbox features.
z
Mailbox Operating Procedure ...................................................................218
z
Selecting a Mailbox...................................................................................220
z
Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox...........................................221
z
Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox .............................................222
z
Configuring/Starting Job Flow...................................................................225
6 Send from Mailbox
Mailbox Operating Procedure
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Opening the [Send from Mailbox] Screen .....................................................................218
Step 2 Selecting a Mailbox .......................................................................................................218
Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ......................................................................218
Step 4 Operating Mailbox Documents......................................................................................219
Step 1 Opening the [Send from Mailbox] Screen
Follow the procedure below to open the [Send from Mailbox] screen.
Note
1
• Features displayed depend on the machine configuration.
Press the <All Services> button.
Send from Mailbox
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
2
6
<All Services>
button
Select [Send from Mailbox].
Step 2 Selecting a Mailbox
Selectable mailboxes depend on the settings on the user authentication feature.
For information on selectable mailboxes, refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" >
"Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.
1
Select a mailbox.
For information on the [Send from
Mailbox] screen, refer to "Selecting a
Mailbox" (P.220).
Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents
1
Select a document.
For information on the [Document List]
screen, refer to "Checking/Operating
Documents in a Mailbox" (P.221).
218
Mailbox Operating Procedure
Step 4 Operating Mailbox Documents
The following shows the reference sections for operations available on the [Send from
Mailbox] screen.
Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox .......................................................................... 222
Configuring/Starting Job Flow................................................................................................. 225
Send from Mailbox
6
219
6 Send from Mailbox
Selecting a Mailbox
The following describes the procedure to select a mailbox.
Selectable mailboxes depend on the settings on the user authentication feature.
For information on selectable mailboxes, refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" >
"Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.
1
Select a mailbox on the [Send from
Mailbox] screen.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen and select
[ ] to move to the next
screen.
• An arrow is displayed next to each mailbox which has a link to a job flow sheet and for which
the auto start is set.
• If you are prompted for a passcode, enter a passcode and select [Enter].
Send from Mailbox
„Go to
Displays a mailbox at the top when you enter the three-digit mailbox number with the
numeric keypad.
6
220
Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox
Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox
You can confirm or operate documents stored in a mailbox.
1
On the [Send from Mailbox] screen,
select a mailbox.
2
Select a document.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
• At the left of each document name, an icon is displayed to show the document type.
:Scanned document
:Print document
:Document for Store for Polling (Private Mailbox)
:Fax document
:Internet Fax document
3
• Up to 9 documents can be selected separately. You can also select all documents. If you
select documents separately, a number appears to the left of the document icon indicating
the order in which it was selected. Documents are processed in this order.
Select any item.
„Refresh
Displays the refreshed information.
„Document List
Lists the documents stored in the mailbox, with their stored dates and pages.
„Stored Document(s)
Displays the number of documents stored in the selected mailbox.
„Select All
Selects all the documents in the mailbox.
„Print/Delete
Displays the [Print/Delete] screen. This screen allows you to print/delete documents
stored in the mailbox
Refer to "Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox" (P.221).
„Job Flow Settings
Displays the [Job Flow Settings] screen. This screen allows you to create, link, and
execute job flows.
Refer to "Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox" (P.222).
Note
• Job flows are not available for print documents. If print documents are included in the
selected documents, a job flow can be executed for the documents other than the print
documents.
221
Send from Mailbox
• You can sort documents in
ascending or descending
order by selecting either
[Document Name] or [Stored Date].
6
6 Send from Mailbox
Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox
You can print/delete documents selected in the mailbox.
1
On the [Document List] screen,
select documents.
2
Select [Print/Delete].
3
Select any item.
„Change Document Name
Send from Mailbox
Allows you to change the name of the document. This is unavailable when multiple
documents are selected.
„Print Settings
Displays the [Mailbox - Print Settings] screen. You can change the print settings of the
document.
Refer to "[Mailbox - Print Settings] Screen" (P.222).
6
„Delete
Deletes the selected document.
„Print
Prints the selected document.
Note
• When a print document stored by [Save to Mailbox] of a print driver is printed, the settings
specified on the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services will override the settings
specified on the print driver except the [Multiple Up], [Skip Blank Pages], and print position
settings.
[Mailbox - Print Settings] Screen
You can change the print settings of the document.
Note
1
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Select any item.
„Batch Print
Allows you to set batch printing.
You can print multiple documents as one document. The documents are bound in
selected order.
Note
222
• For 2-sided printing, the last page becomes blank when the total number of printed pages is
odd. For printing of multiple documents, a blank page is inserted after the final page of each
document.
Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox
• If a different size document is included in multiple documents, it may be printed in improper
orientation.
• [Batch Print] is not available while interrupting another job.
• [Batch Print] is not available for fax/Internet Fax documents such as confidential polling
reserved documents, fax confidential reception documents, and Internet Fax confidential
reception documents.
„Quantity
Allows you to change the quantity.
„Paper Supply
Allows you to select paper.
„2 Sided Printing
Allows you to set 2-sided printing.
„Output
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
For examples of the settings of stapling and hole punching, refer to "When stapling/punching holes"
(P.223).
When stapling/punching holes
The following table shows the stapled/punched positions with the example of [1 Staple]
for stapling and [2 Holes] for punching for documents stored in a mailbox by specifying
[Save to Mailbox] on a print driver and for scanned documents.
Original
Report
Report
Stapling
Position
Report
Report
For documents in a mailbox stored by specifying [Save to Mailbox] on a print driver
Punching
Position
Report
Report
z
223
Send from Mailbox
Allows you to set stapling, punching, and a tray where the output is delivered.
6
6 Send from Mailbox
z
For scanned documents stored in a mailbox
Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document, and the [Original Orientation] setting of [Edge
Erase] or the [2 Sided Scanning] setting of [Layout Adjustment] tab, are the same.
tropeR
Stapling
Position
Report
Report
Punching
Position
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
224
Report
Report
Send from Mailbox
6
tropeR
Report
tropeR
Original
Orientation
Report
tropeR
Original
Report
Configuring/Starting Job Flow
Configuring/Starting Job Flow
Job flow is a feature that allows you to register transfer settings of scan data or
documents received by fax, such as a transfer method and destination, to simplify datatransfer tasks.
A job flow operates on documents stored in a mailbox, and starts in either of the
following ways: 1) manually or automatically start a job flow when a document is stored
in a mailbox, or 2) select a job flow to act on documents stored in a mailbox manually.
To automatically start a job flow, you must make a link with a mailbox and a job flow
sheet in advance. Documents are automatically processed with the job flow sheet when
they are stored in the linked mailbox.
Important • If the Authentication feature is not used, a job flow created in [Send from Mailbox] can only
be used/edited/duplicated/deleted through the mailbox where the job flow is created. This
type of job flow is not displayed on the [Job Flow Sheets] screen. When using the
Authentication feature, job flows whose owners are authenticated are displayed on the [Job
Flow Sheets] screen.
Send from Mailbox
For information on job flows for the scanned documents, refer to "Job Status" (P.245).
Features that can be registered are listed below.
„Forward
Multiple forwarding recipients can be configured for each forwarding method.
z
FTP
Forwards via FTP. Up to 2 recipients can be specified.
z
6
SMB
Forwards via SMB. Up to 2 recipients can be specified.
z
Mail
Forwards via E-mail. Up to 100 recipients can be specified.
z
Fax
Forwards via fax. Up to 100 recipients can be specified.
z
Internet Fax
Forwards via Internet Fax. Up to 100 recipients can be specified.
„Print
Documents in a mailbox can be printed.
Some features are unavailable depending on the store type of the document.
Print
Fax
Internet
Fax*1
Mail
FTP
SMB
Store for Polling
(Private Mailbox)
O
O
O
O
O
O
Scanning
O
O
O
O
O
O
O*2
O
O
O
O
O
Internet Fax
document
O
O
U
U
O
O
Print Stored
X
X
X
X
X
X
Output
Input
Fax document
O: Available
X: Not available
U: Available depending on the settings in the System Administration mode.
225
6 Send from Mailbox
*1 When the profile is set to TIFF-S for the Internet Fax Transfer, always load A4 documents in landscape orientation.
If you load the documents in portrait orientation, Internet Fax images will be reduced in size.
*2 Even if you set to delete documents from a mailbox after a print job is completed, if the USB cable for Fax is pulled
out while a document is being printed.
Note
• When you forward a monochrome (black and white) document via Mail, FTP or SMB while
the Input is set to Document for Store for Polling (Private Mailbox) or Fax document, the
recipient will not be able to open the file if [Output Format] of Job Flow is set to [JPEG].
1
On the [Document List] screen,
select documents.
2
3
Select [Job Flow Settings].
Select any item.
Send from Mailbox
„Auto Start
This sets auto start of the job flow for documents stored in the mailbox. The job flow
automatically starts when a document is stored.
„Start Current Job Flow
Select documents from the mailbox and select this button to start the job flow linked to
this mailbox.
6
Important • After executing the job flow, print the job history report to check the result. For information on
the job history report, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Job
History Report" in the Administrator Guide.
„Cut Link
Cancels the link between a mailbox and the linked job flow sheet.
„Create/Change Link
Displays the [Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] screen.
Refer to "[Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] Screen" (P.226).
„Select Job Flow Sheet
When selecting this button while documents are selected, the [Select Job Flow Sheet]
screen is displayed.
Refer to "[Select Job Flow Sheet] Screen" (P.228).
[Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] Screen
You can change the link between the mailbox and its job flow sheet.
Note
1
• Linking, delinking, and auto start settings can be also performed during the creation of a
mailbox.
Select a job flow sheet to link to.
Important • Selecting [Save] without
selecting a job flow sheet
does not set a link. If the
selected job flow sheet is
already linked, then the link is
cancelled.
226
Configuring/Starting Job Flow
Note
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
• You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by touching either [Name] or
[Updated].
2
• At the left of the name, an icon showing the target of the job flow is displayed.
:Mailbox Document
Select any item.
„Create
Displays the [Create New Job Flow Sheet] screen.
Refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Create Job Flow Sheet" > "Restrictions on Using Job
Flow" > "Create" in the Administrator Guide.
„Edit/Delete
Displays the [Details] screen.
Refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Create Job Flow Sheet" > "Restrictions on Using Job
Flow" > "Edit/Delete" in the Administrator Guide.
Searches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job
flow names that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to
128 characters long.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
„Search by Keyword
Searches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through
keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 12
characters long.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
„Select Keyword
Displays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword to search for job flows. Job
flows that fully match the entry are searched. The machine searches through keywords
that were registered upon each job flow creation.
„Sheet Filtering
Displays the [Sheet Filtering] screen allowing you to filter the job flow sheets displayed.
For more information, refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.227).
[Sheet Filtering] Screen
Filters the job flow sheets displayed.
Displayed job flow sheets may vary depending on the user authentication feature. Refer to "13
Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" in
the Administrator Guide.
1
Select the filtering conditions, then
select [Save].
Note
• The job flows that can be
displayed on [Send from
Mailbox] are those whose
[Target] is [Mailbox], and
those stored on the machine.
„Owner
Allows you to select an owner.
227
Send from Mailbox
„Search by Name
6
6 Send from Mailbox
„Target
Allows you to select the target of the job flow sheet.
[Select Job Flow Sheet] Screen
You can select and modify job flow sheets associated with the mailbox.
1
Select a job flow, and press the
<Start> button.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
• You can sort the list in
ascending or descending order by pressing either [Name] or [Updated].
• At the left of the name, an icon showing the target of the job flow is displayed.
:Mailbox Document
„Start
Send from Mailbox
Executes the selected job flow sheet.
„Details
Displays the [Details] screen.
Refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup & Calibration" > "Create Job Flow Sheet" > "Restrictions on Using Job
Flow" > "Edit/Delete" in the Administrator Guide.
„Change Settings
6
If the selected job flow sheet setting is editable, the [Change Settings] screen appears.
You can temporarily change the settings.
„Search by Name
Searches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job
flow names that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to
128 characters long.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
„Search by Keyword
Searches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through
keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 12
characters long.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
„Select Keyword
Displays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword to search for job flows. Job
flows that fully match the entry are searched. The machine searches through keywords
that were registered upon each job flow creation.
„Sheet Filtering
Displays the [Sheet Filtering] screen.
For more information, refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.227).
228
Configuring/Starting Job Flow
Job Flow Restrictions
A job flow sheet can be used by only one user, can be shared by multiple users, or can
be used for only certain mailboxes.
Job flow restrictions may vary depending on the user authentication feature. For more information, refer
to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and
Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.
Send from Mailbox
6
229
7 Job Flow Sheets
This chapter describes the scanning operation using a job flow sheet created on
a network computer and registered in the machine.
Job Flow Sheets is a feature that allows you to register transfer settings of scan
data, such as a transfer method and destination, to simplify data-transfer tasks.
z
Job Flow Procedure..................................................................................232
z
Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet......................................................234
7 Job Flow Sheets
Job Flow Procedure
Job flow sheets are categorized into two types according to the target. One type of job
flow sheets targets scanned documents, and the other type targets documents stored
in mailboxes. This chapter describes the first type of job flow sheets, targeting scanned
documents.
For details on the job flow sheets that target documents stored in mailboxes, refer to "Configuring/
Starting Job Flow" (P.225)
This section explains how to select a job flow sheet and execute the job flow. Refer to
the following sections for detailed steps.
To create and register a job flow sheet, use a personal computer.
Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen ..........................................................................232
Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet ............................................................................................232
Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet.....................................................................233
Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet ...........................................................................................233
For information on how to create and register job flow sheets, refer to the manual stored on the CDROM in the Driver CD Kit.
Job Flow Sheets
Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen
Follow the procedure below to open the [Job Flow Sheets] screen.
1
Press the <All Services> button.
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
2
Select [Job Flow Sheets].
Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet
1
Select a job flow sheet.
For more information on the [Job Flow
Sheets] screen, refer to "Selecting/
Changing a Job Flow Sheet" (P.234).
232
<All Services>
button
Job Flow Procedure
Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet
1
To see the details, select [Details].
To change the settings, select
[Change Settings].
For information on checking/changing job
flow settings, refer to "Selecting/Changing
a Job Flow Sheet" (P.234).
Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet
1
Load the originals.
Note
2
• A job flow sheet with application linkage does not require loading documents.
Press the <Start> button.
Job Flow Sheets
Important • After executing the job flow, be sure to print the job history report to check the result. For
information on the job history report, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" >
"Reports" > "Job History Report" in the Administrator Guide.
7
233
7 Job Flow Sheets
Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet
To use a job flow sheet whose target is scanned documents from a network computer
with CentreWare EasyOperator, select the job flow sheet from this list.
Important • If characters not supported by the machine are used in the name or description of a job flow
sheet, the characters will not be displayed or will be garbled on the screen.
For information on characters that can be used in the names or descriptions of job flow sheets, refer to
"15 Appendix" > "Notes and Restrictions" > "Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine" in the
Administrator Guide.
Note
• To communicate with network computers, the SOAP port must be enabled on the machine.
• A job flow sheet created on a network computer can be deleted, but cannot be changed or
duplicated. Note, however, change-permitted items can be used by making a temporary
change to them.
For information on how to enable the port, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Port
Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
1
Select a job flow sheet.
Note
Job Flow Sheets
• Displayed job flow sheets may
vary depending on the user
authentication feature.
For more information, refer to
"13 Authentication and
Account Administration" >
"Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" > "Overview" > "Job Flow Sheet Types
and Overview" in the Administrator Guide.
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
• You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by selecting either [Name] or [Last
Updated].
7
„Refresh
Displays refreshed information.
„Details
The [Details] screen appears. Allows you to confirm the details of a job flow such as the
name, last update and save location. When you select [Details...], the whole text of the
description which was registered when creating the job flow sheet is displayed.
„Change Settings
Displays the [Change Settings] screen. Allows you to change the job flow settings.
Refer to "[Change Settings] Screen" (P.235).
„Search by Name
Searches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job
flow names that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to
128 characters long.
„Search by Keyword
Searches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through
keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 12
characters long.
„Select Keyword
Displays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword registered in the system
settings to search for job flows. Job flows that fully match the entry are searched. The
machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation.
234
Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet
„Sheet Filtering
Displays the [Sheet Filtering] screen allowing you to filter the job flow sheets displayed.
For more information, refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.235).
[Change Settings] Screen
1
Select a group to be changed from
[Group of Items].
2
Select the item to be changed.
Note
3
• A triangle icon appears at the
left of each mandatory item.
Select any item.
„Items
The items set for the job flow sheet.
Job Flow Sheets
„Current Settings
The values set for the job flow sheet.
„Previous Group
Displays the items of the previous group.
7
„Next Group
Displays the items of the next group.
„Add E-mail Recipient
Adds recipients for the e-mail.
[Sheet Filtering] Screen
Filters the job flow sheets displayed. Job flow sheets displayed on the screen depend
on the settings of the Authentication feature.
Displayed job flow sheets may vary depending on the user authentication feature. For more information,
refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and
Mailboxes" > "Overview" > "Job Flow Sheet Types and Overview" in the Administrator Guide.
1
Select the filtering conditions, then
select [Save].
„Owner
Select an owner of job flow sheets displayed on the screen.
„Target
Select a target for the job flow sheet.
Note
• Job flow sheets whose [Target] is [Mailbox] can be used only from Send from Mailbox.
235
8 Stored Programming
This chapter describes the Stored Programming feature that enables you to
store customized job settings.
z
Stored Programming Overview.................................................................238
z
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs....................................239
z
Calling a Stored Program .........................................................................243
8 Stored Programming
Stored Programming Overview
This feature allows you to store settings that you expect to use frequently and call them
with a single button operation. You can also assign a screen to a stored program
button, to use the button as a short-cut to the screen.
A stored program can store not only settings of a feature, but a flow of settings
configured on multiple screens.
For example, this feature is available when you want to record a procedure starting
from pressing the <Machine Status> button, to displaying the [Report Job] screen to
print a job history report.
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs ....................................................................239
Calling a Stored Program..........................................................................................................243
Stored Programming
8
238
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs
The [Stored Programming] screen allows you to register and delete stored programs.
Important • When registering a stored program to select paper size or type loaded on the bypass tray,
register both the paper size and the paper type. If only the paper size or type is registered,
the stored program may not be called properly.
• If any of the following operations is performed while a stored program is being registered,
the stored program may not be registered or may not work correctly.
- Removing or inserting a paper tray
- Loading or reloading paper on the bypass tray
• If any of the following operations is performed after a stored program registration, the
registered stored program may not be called properly.
- If the stored program has the Watermark feature and the Watermark value is changed.
- If any registered feature becomes disabled due to its value change under System Settings.
- If the stored program has an operation for a mailbox and the mailbox passcode is changed.
Note
• Any services that are set using the following cannot be registered: System Settings,
[Browse...] under Scan to PC, Job Flow Sheets, Network Scanning, Address Book, and
other stored programs.
• A stored program registration is cancelled when the <Interrupt> button is pressed, the Auto
Clear feature causes a time-out, or a popup window (such as a paper jam window) appears.
Press the <All Services> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
2
Select [Setup].
3
Select [Stored Programming].
4
Select the feature.
<All Services>
button
„Store
Register a stored program.
Refer to "Registering Stored Programs" (P.240).
„Delete
Deletes a stored program.
Refer to "Deleting Stored Programs" (P.241).
239
Stored Programming
1
8
8 Stored Programming
„Enter/Change Name
Enter or change a stored program name.
Refer to "Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name" (P.241).
„Assign/Change Icon
Configure an icon for a registered stored program.
Refer to "Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs" (P.241).
Registering Stored Programs
Up to 58 actions can be registered with one stored program. Up to 40 stored programs
can be registered in the machine.
Actions registered in stored programs No.1 to 20 can also be performed by using one
touch buttons <M01> to <M20>. (This feature is available only when the optional Fax
service is installed).
The following is the procedure for registering actions with stored programs.
Important • If registered settings such as tray paper size and comments, or default values in the system
settings are changed after a stored program is registered, then the program's content also
changes.
Stored Programming
Note
• Services using System Settings, Job Flow Sheet, Network Scanning, or Address Book
cannot be registered.
• The registering procedure for a stored program is cancelled when the <Interrupt> button is
pressed, the Auto Clear feature causes a time-out, or a popup window (paper jam, etc.)
appears.
1
2
8
Select [Store].
Select the number to register.
Note
3
• Once a job is stored to a
button, it cannot be
overwritten.
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.
Set the feature you want to register.
Note
• The machine produces an audible tone while a stored program is registered.
• Press the <Interrupt> button to cancel registration.
4
You can change the volume of the sound that notifies of stored program registration. For information on
the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Stored Programming
Tone" in the Administrator Guide.
Press the <Start> button or <Clear All> button.
Note
• If no name is entered for a registered stored program, the name becomes "No Name".
For information on how to name a registered stored program, refer to "Entering/Changing a Stored
Program Name" (P.241).
240
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs
Deleting Stored Programs
The following is the procedure for deleting stored programs.
1
2
Select [Delete].
Select the number to delete.
Note
3
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
Select [Delete].
„Delete
Deletes the stored program.
Note
• Deleted stored programs cannot be restored.
„Cancel
Cancels deleting the stored program.
The following is the procedure for entering or changing the name of a stored program.
Up to 36 characters are allowed for a stored program's name.
For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.47).
1
2
Select [Enter/Change Name].
3
8
Select the number to register or
change a name.
Note
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
Enter a name, and select [Save].
Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs
The following is the procedure for assigning or changing an icon of a stored program.
12 icons are available.
1
2
Select [Assign/Change Icon].
Select the number to assign or
change an icon.
Note
Stored Programming
Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
241
8 Stored Programming
3
Select an icon, and select [Save].
„No Icon
No icon is assigned to a registered stored program.
„Icon
Select an icon according to the content of the registered stored program.
Stored Programming
8
242
Calling a Stored Program
Calling a Stored Program
This describes the procedure for calling a stored program.
When calling a specified stored program, the last screen shown when you registered
the stored programming appears.
1
Press the <All Services> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
Select [Stored Programming].
3
Select the number of a stored
program containing the features
you want to use.
Note
4
5
Stored Programming
2
<All Services>
button
• You can only select registered
numbers.
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.
After the stored program is called, select other features if necessary.
8
Press the <Start> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Start> button
C
243
9 Job Status
This chapter describes the job status feature.
z
Job Status Overview.................................................................................246
z
Checking Current/Pending Jobs ...............................................................247
z
Checking Completed Jobs........................................................................248
z
Printing and Deleting Stored Documents..................................................249
z
Printing Pending Jobs...............................................................................259
z
Handling Error Terminations.....................................................................260
9 Job Status
Job Status Overview
The job status feature allows you to check current, pending, and completed jobs. You
can also cancel printing and print pending jobs.
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Job Status>
button
C
You can do the following on the [Job Status] screen.
„Checking Current/Pending Jobs
Lists current and pending jobs, and displays their details. Also allows you to cancel
current or pending jobs.
For more information, refer to "Checking Current/Pending Jobs" (P.247).
„Checking Completed Jobs
Displays the status of completed jobs. Also displays their details.
For more information, refer to "Checking Completed Jobs" (P.248).
Job Status
„Checking Stored Documents
9
„Job Priority Printing
Prints or deletes documents stored using the Charge Print, Secure Print, Private
Charge Print, Sample Set, and Delayed Print features.
For more information, refer to "Printing and Deleting Stored Documents" (P.249).
You can preferentially print pending jobs.
For more information, refer to "Printing Pending Jobs" (P.259).
246
Checking Current/Pending Jobs
Checking Current/Pending Jobs
This section describes how to check current or pending jobs. On the status screen, you
can cancel or preferentially execute jobs.
1
2
Press the <Job Status> button.
Select the job to be cancelled or
preferentially executed.
Note
3
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
• From the drop-down menu, you can select and display the types of jobs ([All Jobs], [Printer &
Print from Mailbox Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax], [Job Flow & auto file transfer]).
Select an appropriate button
displayed on the screen.
„Print Waiting Jobs
Select this to forcibly print the jobs in Print Wait status.
For more information, refer to "Printing Pending Jobs" (P.259).
„Delete
Job Status
Cancels the current or pending job.
„Promote Job
Preferentially executes the selected job.
A [ ] will be marked on the [Status] of the job set to [Promote Job].
9
„Stop
Stops the job processing.
„Last Original
Select this to end scanning of documents. The job is then executed.
„Next Original
Select this when you have another document to scan.
„Start
Resumes the stopped job.
247
9 Job Status
Checking Completed Jobs
This section describes how to check completed jobs.
You can check whether a job has been completed successfully. Also, you can select a
job to see the details.
1
2
Press the <Job Status> button.
Select the [Completed Jobs] tab.
Note
3
4
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
• From the drop-down menu,
you can select and display the types of jobs ([All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Mailbox Jobs],
[Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax], [Job Flow & auto file transfer]).
Select a job to see the details.
Select [Close] after the check.
„Group Parent Jobs
Allows you to check the list or history of related jobs (such as job flow jobs).
Job Status
„Show Children Jobs
Displays a job list.
„Print this Job History Report
Prints the job results to allow you to check the job history.
9
248
Printing and Deleting Stored Documents
Printing and Deleting Stored Documents
This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Secure Print or
Sample Set feature, or stored with the charge print receiving control. The [Job Status]
screen allows you to print or delete stored documents.
The following shows the reference section for each item.
Secure Print .............................................................................................................................. 249
Sample Set................................................................................................................................ 251
Delayed Print............................................................................................................................ 252
Charge Print.............................................................................................................................. 253
Private Charge Print ................................................................................................................. 255
Public Mailbox ......................................................................................................................... 256
Undelivered Faxes.................................................................................................................... 257
1
2
Press the <Job Status> button.
Select the [Secure Print Jobs &
More] tab.
The buttons displayed on the screen vary
depending on the settings related to the
Private Charge Print feature. For more
information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/
Private Print Settings" > in the Administrator Guide.
This feature allows you to temporarily store print data in the machine to print it with the
print command from the machine.
This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Secure Print
feature.
For information on secure print operations, refer to the print driver's help.
Note
• This feature is not displayed when [Receive Control] under [Charge/Private Print Settings] is
set to either of the followings:
- [According to Print Account] is selected, and [Job Login Success] is set to [Save in Private
Print]
- [Save in Private Print] is selected.
When you have selected [Save in Private Charge Print] or [Save in Charge Print] for [Receive Control]
under [Charge/Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Secure Print] under [Secure Print Jobs
& More] even if you select [Secure Print] on the print driver. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" >
"Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the
Administrator Guide.
1
2
Select [Secure Print].
Select the user to be checked, and
select [Document List].
Note
• Select [Refresh] to display the
updated information
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to
move to the next screen.
• Entering a 3-digit billing ID with the numeric keypad specifies the user directly.
249
Job Status
Secure Print
9
9 Job Status
3
Enter the passcode, and select
[Confirm].
Note
• If no passcode is assigned,
the passcode entry screen will
not appear.
4
Select the document to be printed
or deleted.
5
Select any item.
„Select All
Selects all documents. To deselect all the documents, select this button again.
„Delete
Deletes the selected document.
Note
• If documents with the same user ID are all deleted, the user ID will be deleted.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.250).
„Print
Prints the selected document.
Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.250).
When [Delete] is Selected
1
Select [Delete].
Job Status
„Delete
Deletes the document.
Important • Once the document is
deleted, it cannot be restored.
9
„Cancel
Cancels deleting the document.
When [Print] is Selected
1
Select what to do with the
document after printing.
„Print and Delete
Starts printing the document. After
printing, deletes the document.
„Print and Save
Starts printing the document. After printing, the document remains undeleted.
„Cancel
Cancels printing the document.
„Quantity
Allows to specify the number of print.
Note
250
• [Quantity] is disabled when you use [Select All] to select all documents.
Printing and Deleting Stored Documents
• When you select [Print and Save], the setting of [Quantity] is also saved.
Sample Set
Before printing multiple sets of a document, you can first print one copy for trial, and
then print the rest from the machine.
This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Sample Set
feature.
For information on Sample Set operations, refer to the print driver's help.
Note
• When you have selected [Save in Private Charge Print] or [Save in Charge Print] for
[Receive Control] under [Charge/Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Sample
Set] under [Secure Print Jobs & More] even if you select [Sample Set] on the print driver.
For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" >
"Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
1
2
Select [Sample Set].
Select the user to be checked, and
select [Document List].
Note
• Select [Refresh] to display the
updated information.
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
• Entering a 3-digit user ID with the numeric keypad specifies the user directly.
Select the document to be printed
or deleted.
4
Select any item.
Job Status
3
„Select All
Selects all documents. To deselect all the documents, select this button again.
9
„Delete
Deletes the selected document.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.251).
„Print
Prints a Sample Set document. After printing the remaining sets of the document, the
stored Sample Set document is deleted.
Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.252)
When [Delete] is Selected
1
Select [Delete].
„Delete
Deletes the document.
Important • Once the document is deleted, it cannot be restored.
„Cancel
Cancels deleting the document.
251
9 Job Status
When [Print] is Selected
1
Select [Yes].
„Yes
Starts printing the document. After
printing, deletes the document.
Note
• If a time period specified in [Auto Job Release] elapses with no operation carried out after
printing the first print set, the machine automatically prints the second print set. If you do not
want the second print set to be printed automatically, specify a longer time period in [Auto
Job Release]. For how to set [Auto Job Release], refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service
Settings" > "Machine Clock/Timers" > "Auto Job Release" in the Administrator Guide.
„No
Cancels printing the document.
„Quantity
Allows to specify the number of print.
Note
• [Quantity] is disabled when you use [Select All] to select all documents.
Delayed Print
This feature allows you to temporarily store print data on the machine to print it at
specified time.
Job Status
This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Delayed Print
feature.
For information on Delayed Print operations, refer to the print driver's help.
Note
9
1
2
• When you have selected [Save in Private Charge Print] or [Save in Charge Print] for
[Receive Control] under [Charge/Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Delayed
Print] under [Secure Print Jobs & More] even if you select [Delayed Print] on the print driver.
For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" >
"Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
Select [Delayed Print].
Select the document to be printed
or deleted.
Note
• Select [Refresh] to display the
updated information.
• Select [ ] to return to the
previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.
• [Print Time] shows the time to start printing.
3
Select any item.
„Delete
Deletes the selected document.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.253).
„Print
Prints the selected document. After printing, deletes the document. If printed manually,
the document will not be printed at the specified time.
Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.253).
252
Printing and Deleting Stored Documents
When [Delete] is Selected
1
Select [Delete].
„Delete
Deletes the document.
Important • Once the document is
deleted, it cannot be restored.
„Cancel
Cancels deleting the document.
When [Print] is Selected
1
Select [Yes].
„Yes
Starts printing the document. After
printing, deletes the document.
„No
Cancels printing the document.
Charge Print
When you set to use the Charge Print feature under [System Settings] >
[Authentication/Security Settings] > [Authentication] > [Charge/Private Print Settings] >
[Receive Control], received print jobs are saved for each Billing ID. Any jobs that were
not given a Billing ID on the print driver are saved in [No User ID].
For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Accounting" > "Create/View User Accounts" in the
Administrator Guide.
Note
• This item is displayed when you have set to save in Charge Print. To set to save in Charge
Print, perform one of the following settings in the System Administration mode:
- Set [Receive Control] to [Save in Charge Print].
- Set [Receive Control] to [According to Print Account], and [Job Login Failure] to [Save in
Charge Print].
- Set [Receive Control] to [According to Print Account] or [Private Charge Print], and [Job
without User ID] to [Save in Charge Print].
For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" >
"Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.
The following describes how to print or delete documents stored in Charge Print.
1
2
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
Enter the user ID using the
numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed, and select [Enter].
253
Job Status
This feature prevents unauthorized users from operating print jobs by authenticating
the users on the machine. When this feature is set, the machine prints only the jobs of
authenticated users. You can also set the machine to store print jobs temporarily, and
print them from the machine’s control panel.
9
9 Job Status
3
4
Select [Charge Print].
Select the user to be checked, and
select [Document List].
Note
• Select [Refresh] to display the
updated information.
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
• Entering a 3-digit user ID with the numeric keypad specifies the user directly.
5
Enter the passcode, and select
[Confirm].
Note
• If no passcode is assigned,
the passcode entry screen will
not appear.
6
Select the document to be printed
or deleted.
7
Select any item.
„Delete
Deletes the document stored with Charge Print.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.254).
„Print
Prints the document stored with Charge Print.
Job Status
Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.254).
When [Delete] is Selected
1
9
Select [Delete].
„Delete
Deletes the document.
Important • Once the document is
deleted, it cannot be restored.
„Cancel
Cancels deleting the document.
When [Print] is Selected
1
Select what to do with the
document after printing.
„Print and Delete
Starts printing the document. After
printing, deletes the document.
„Print and Save
Starts printing the document. After printing, the document remains undeleted.
„Cancel
Cancels printing the document.
254
Printing and Deleting Stored Documents
„Quantity
Allows to specify the number of print.
Note
• [Quantity] is disabled when you use [Select All] to select all documents.
Private Charge Print
The feature allows you to temporarily store print data in the machine for each
authentication user ID, and request on the machine's control panel to print the data. As
the feature enables you to select and print only the necessary documents, you can
avoid printing unneeded jobs. Because the machine displays only the documents of
authenticated users, privacy of the users is securely protected. The Private Print
feature is suitable for authenticating and managing specific users managed by the
system administrator.
When you set to use the Private Charge Print feature, received print jobs are saved for
each authentication user ID.
Note
• This item is displayed when the Private Charge Print feature is enabled by using one of the
following procedures:
• [According to Print Accounting] is selected, and [Job Login Success] is set to [Save in
Private Charge Print].
• [Save in Private Charge Print] is selected.
When deleting the print job instructed with an invalid user ID, display the list of print jobs in the
authenticated system administrator mode, and then select the job to be deleted.
For more information, refer to "3 Maintenance" > "Deleting the Private Print Job with an Invalid User
ID" in the Administrator Guide. For information on how to set a User ID, refer to "5 Tools" >
"Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the
Administrator Guide.
Job Status
The following describes how to print or delete a document stored with the Private
Charge Print feature.
1
2
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
3
Select [Private Charge Print].
Enter the user ID with the numeric
keypad or the keyboard displayed,
and select [Enter].
Note
9
• If you are authenticated as a system administrator, selecting [Private Charge Print] will
display a list of authentication user IDs. Select a user ID from the list, and then select
[Document List] to display a list of documents stored for the selected user.
4
Select the document to be printed
or deleted.
5
Select any item.
„Select All
Selects all documents. To deselect all the documents, select this button again.
„Delete
Deletes the Private Charge Print document.
Note
• If documents with the same user ID are all deleted, the user ID will be deleted.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.256).
„Print
Prints the Private Charge Print document.
255
9 Job Status
Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.256).
When [Delete] is Selected
1
Select [Delete].
„Delete
Deletes the document.
Important • Once the document is
deleted, it cannot be restored.
„Cancel
Cancels deleting the document.
When [Print] is Selected
1
Select what to do with the
document after printing.
„Print and Delete
Starts printing the document. After
printing, deletes the document.
„Print and Save
Starts printing the document. After printing, the document remains undeleted.
Job Status
„Cancel
Cancels printing the document.
„Quantity
Allows to specify the number of print.
9
Note
• [Quantity] is disabled when you use [Select All] to select all documents.
• When you select [Print and Save], the setting of [Quantity] is also saved.
Public Mailbox
This feature allows you to store data in the machine, and send the data by operating
on a remote terminal.
This section describes how to print or delete a document stored in a public mailbox.
For information on how to operate Public Mailbox, refer to "Store for Polling (Allowing Remote
Machines to Retrieve Documents from Your Machine)" (P.155).
Note
1
2
Select [Public Mailbox].
Select the document to be printed
or deleted.
Note
3
256
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• Select [Refresh] to display the
updated information.
• Select [
Select any item.
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
Printing and Deleting Stored Documents
„Select All
Selects all documents. To deselect all the documents, select this button again.
„Delete
Deletes the selected document.
Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.257).
„Print
Prints the selected document.
Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.257).
When [Delete] is Selected
1
Select [Delete].
„Delete
Deletes the document.
Important • Once the document is
deleted, it cannot be restored.
„Cancel
Cancels deleting the document.
When [Print] is Selected
Starts printing the document.
Job Status
Undelivered Faxes
This section describes how to re-send or delete an undelivered fax document.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• This feature may not be displayed depending on the system settings.
1
2
Select [Undelivered Faxes].
Select the document to be re-sent
or deleted.
Note
3
• Select [Refresh] to display the
updated information.
• Select [
] to return to the previous screen or [
] to move to the next screen.
Select any item.
To re-send to the previously
specified fax number, press the
<Start> button.
„Delete This Document
Deletes the selected document.
Refer to "When [Delete This Document] is Selected" (P.258).
„Change Recipients...
Allows you to change the number, and re-send the document.
Refer to "When [Change Recipients...] is Selected" (P.258).
257
9
9 Job Status
When [Delete This Document] is Selected
1
Select [Delete This Document].
„Delete
Deletes the fax document.
„Cancel
Cancels deleting the fax document.
When [Change Recipients...] is Selected
Specify a fax recipient for the undelivered fax document.
Besides the fax recipient, the following features can be changed on the control panel:
z
Starting Rate
z
Recipient
Important • If the fax number is changed, the setting for adding a header will be disabled.
For information on how to specify a fax number, refer to "Step 3 Specifying Destinations" (P.111).
Job Status
9
258
Printing Pending Jobs
Printing Pending Jobs
This section describes how to print pending jobs.
Note
1
2
• If there are no pending jobs, the [Print Waiting Jobs] button is disabled.
Press the <Job Status> button.
Select [Print Waiting Jobs].
Job Status
9
259
9 Job Status
Handling Error Terminations
This section describes how to handle error terminations.
„For a Print Job
Select a job shown as an error termination in the [Completed Jobs] tab to check the
error code. Follow the error code instructions.
For information on error codes, refer to "14 Problem Solving" > "Error Code" in the Administrator
Guide.
„For a Fax Job
A transmission report (undelivered) is printed.
For more information on transmission reports (undelivered), refer to "4 Machine Status" > "Machine
Information" > "Automatically Printed Reports/Lists" > "Transmission Report - Job Undelivered" in the
Administrator Guide. For details on how to print transmission reports (undelivered) automatically, refer
to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "File Transfer Report - Fax Server" in the
Administrator Guide.
„For a Scan Job
A transmission report (undelivered) is printed.
For more information on transmission reports (undelivered), refer to "4 Machine Status" > "Machine
Information" > "Automatically Printed Reports/Lists" > "Transmission Report - Job Undelivered" in the
Administrator Guide. For details on how to print transmission reports (undelivered) automatically, refer
to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Scan File Transfer Report" in the
Administrator Guide.
Job Status
„For Other Jobs
Print a Job History Report, and check the execution results.
For information about job history reports, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports"
> "Job History Report" in the Administrator Guide.
9
When an error code is displayed in [Transmission Report - Undelivered] or [Job History Report], refer
to "14 Problem Solving" > "Error Code" in the Administrator Guide.
260
10 Computer Operations
This chapter describes how to print documents, import scanned documents,
perform Direct Fax, and operate CentreWare Internet Services on your
computer.
Note
• Some models do not support the features described in this chapter. An optional
package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• The computer screen images shown in this section are as of October 2007.
z
Features Overview....................................................................................262
z
Print ..........................................................................................................263
z
E-mail Printing ..........................................................................................266
z
Sending Fax..............................................................................................268
z
Importing Scanned Data ...........................................................................270
z
CentreWare Internet Services ..................................................................277
10 Computer Operations
Features Overview
This section describes the overview of features that can be operated on a computer.
„Printing
You can submit a print job to the machine from a computer.
For details, refer to "Print" (P.263).
„E-mail Printing
You can submit a print job to the machine from a computer by sending an E-mail
attached with a document in TIFF, PDF, JPEG (JFIF), or XPS format.
For details, refer to "E-mail Printing" (P.266).
„Sending Fax
You can send a fax directly from a computer.
For details, refer to "Sending Fax" (P.268).
„Importing Scanned Data
You can import documents stored in a mailbox of the machine to a computer.
For details, refer to "Importing Scanned Data" (P.270).
„CentreWare Internet Services
Computer Operations
You can display the machine status and job status. The feature also allows you to
change the settings. You can also import documents stored in a mailbox.
For details, refer to"CentreWare Internet Services" (P.277).
For details on how to import scanned data stored in a mailbox, refer to "Importing Using CentreWare
Internet Services" (P.274).
10
262
Print
Print
The following describes how to print with the machine by operating on a PC.
Print Features
The main print features of the machine are as follows:
To learn about print features, click [Help] on the print driver screen to see the print driver's online help.
For information on printing, refer to "Printing" (P.265).
Note
• Some features are not available unless you perform optional component settings in the
[Printer] tab. The unavailable features are grayed out.
„Multiple-Up
Prints multiple pages onto one sheet of paper.
„2 Sided Printing
Prints data on both sides of paper.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is
necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
„Poster
„Booklet Creation
Performs 2-sided printing and page allocation for printing a booklet in the correct page
order. Only available when the machine has the 2-sided printing feature.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is
necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
„Transparency Separators
Automatically inserts a blank sheet of paper as a separator each time a transparency
is printed.
„Watermark
Prints fixed text, such as "Confidential", over the print data.
„Secure Print
Temporarily stores the print data on the machine, to print it with the print command from
the machine. This feature allows you to set a passcode, which is helpful to print
confidential documents.
For information on how to print, refer to "Secure Print" (P.249).
„Sample Set
Before printing multiple sets of a document, you can first print one copy for trial, and
then print the rest from the machine.
For information on how to print, refer to "Sample Set" (P.251).
„Delayed Print
Temporarily stores the print data on the machine to print it at specified time.
263
Computer Operations
Splits one page of print data into multiple sheets of paper and enlarges the printed
image to fit the size of each sheet. Used to create large posters, etc.
10
10 Computer Operations
For information on how to print, refer to "Delayed Print" (P.252).
„Save to Mailbox
Temporarily stores the print data in a registered mailbox, to print it with the print
command from the machine.
Important • The print result of the Print from Mailbox feature may be inferior to the other print results in
quality.
• This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is
necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
For information on how to print, refer to "Printing/Deleting Documents in the Mailbox" (P.222).
E-mail Printing
When the E-mail feature is available, allows you to send e-mail with the TIFF, PDF,
JPEG (JFIF), or XPS format documents attachment from a computer to the machine.
The received e-mail is automatically printed from the machine.
Note
• If the Authentication feature is enabled, received e-mails are not printed automatically.
• This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is
necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
For details on how to use this software, refer to "E-mail Printing" (P.266).
Print Features Using Authentication Information
„Charge Print
Computer Operations
Authenticates users to prevent unauthorized printing. The machine holds a print job
and prints it when the user is authenticated. The machine can also be configured to
store multiple print jobs until the user requests to print them on the control panel.
In addition, by registering a user ID and passcode for the authentication on the machine in
advance, only the registered user can print the documents.
Note
• To prohibit users other than you from operating documents, a passcode should be
registered for the Billing ID on the print driver.
For details on how to setup charge printing, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" >
"Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide. For information on how
to print, refer to "Charge Print" (P.253).
10
„Private Charge Print
This feature allows you to temporarily store print data in the machine for each
authentication user ID, and request on the machine’s control panel to print the data. As
the feature enables you to select and print only the necessary documents, you can
avoid printing unneeded jobs. Because the machine displays only the documents of
authenticated users, privacy of the users is securely protected. This feature is suitable
for authenticating and managing specific users managed by the system administrator.
Note
• If you do not want to store unneeded documents, you can configure the machine to store
only the jobs whose authentication succeeded.
For details on how to set up private charge print, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings"
> "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide. For information on
how to print, refer to "Private Charge Print" (P.255).
Setup
In order to print from your computer, a print driver must be installed on the computer.
For instructions on installing the print driver, refer to the manual contained in the CD-ROM of the
Driver CD Kit.
264
Print
Note
• When printing using authentication information, you must configure the settings of a printer
on your computer. Set items as necessary on the [Default Settings] tab of the printer’s
property screen. For more information, refer to the help of the print driver.
Printing
This section describes the print procedure.
The print procedure depends on the application software you use. For details, refer to
the documentation provided with the application.
To learn about print features, click [Help] on the print driver screen to see the print driver's online help.
1
2
3
Select [Print] from the [File] menu on the application.
Confirm [Printer Name] and click [Properties] if necessary.
Set the properties if necessary.
Note
4
5
• You can change the print
feature with [Job Type].
Click [OK].
Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.
Computer Operations
10
265
10 Computer Operations
E-mail Printing
You can send e-mail attaching TIFF, PDF, JPEG (JFIF), or XPS documents from a
computer to the machine. Received e-mail is automatically printed. This feature is
called "E-mail Printing".
Note
• If the machine is in the authentication mode, received E-mails will not be printed
automatically.
• This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is
necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Setup
To use the E-mail Printing feature, the following setup is necessary. Check with your
system or network administrator whether these settings have been completed.
„Network Environment Settings
In order to use E-mail Printing, an e-mail account must be registered.
„E-mail Environment Settings
Settings for the port activation, machine's e-mail address, TCP/IP environment, e-mail
server, etc.
Computer Operations
For information on E-mail Environment Settings, refer to "8 E-mail Environment Settings" in the
Administrator Guide.
Sending E-Mail
The following describes how to send e-mail from the computer to the machine, using
Outlook Express as an example.
1
10
Use your e-mail software to create an e-mail body, and then attach a document to the
e-mail if necessary.
Important • Only plain text is permitted for the e-mail body. Change the body text format to plain text by
the e-mail software setting.
• Any forwarded e-mail (that is attached to another e-mail) cannot be printed.
Note
• If the extension of the attached files is other than ".tif", ".tiff", ".pdf", ".jpeg", ".jpg", ".jpe",
".jfif", and ".xps", the file may not be printed correctly.
• Up to 31 documents can be attached.
2
Enter the machine's e-mail address
as a recipient.
3
Send the e-mail.
Note
266
• The printer prints the e-mail body and the attached documents according to the following
settings. The offset output setting is disabled in all cases.
E-mail Printing
- E-mail body:
Default values of the PCL print driver for this machine which is installed on the computer
- TIFF or JPEG formatted attached file:
Default values of the logical printer set in [Memory Settings] of [TIFF/JPEG] in [Emulation
Settings] of CentreWare Internet Services
- PDF formatted attached file:
Settings of the PDF direct print when [Print Processing Mode] of the PDF direct print is set
to [PDF Bridge].
Default values of the logical printer configured by [Logical Printer Number] of [PostScript] in
[Emulation Settings] of CentreWare Internet Services when [Print Processing Mode] of the
PDF direct print is set to [PS].
Computer Operations
10
267
10 Computer Operations
Sending Fax
This section describes how to use the Direct Fax feature.
The Direct Fax procedure depends on the application you use. For details, refer to the
documentation provided with the application.
For details on the Direct Fax feature, click [Help] on the print driver screen to see the print driver's
online help.
Important • The Direct Fax feature is not available when the Fax Server is enabled.
• This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is
necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Computer Operations
1
2
3
Select [Print] from the [File] menu on the application.
4
5
6
Click [OK].
7
Click [OK].
The [Fax Job Confirmation] dialog
box appears after you have sent a
fax job. A list of recipients to
whom the fax job is being sent will be displayed.
Select a fax printer from [Printer Name].
Click [Properties], and select [Fax]
for [Job Type].
Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.
Specify a destination in the [Fax
Recipient] dialog box.
Registering Destinations
The following describes how to register fax destinations from the machine to another
machine (DocuCentre-III C4100/C3100) in one operation through a computer.
10
You can use the same procedure to register fax destinations from another machine
(DocuCentre-III C4100/C3100) to this machine.
The registration requires CentreWare Internet Services.
For information on CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.277).
The control panel allows you to register destinations separately. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup
& Calibration" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.
Important • Because CentreWare Internet Services is accessible by multiple users simultaneously, the
registered data will have a risk to be overwritten if a system administrator ID and passcode
are not set. We recommend that data edit is permitted only by a system administrator with a
passcode.
• Be sure not to perform this operation simultaneously with the address number registration
from the control panel.
• If a number is duplicated, the existing number will be overwritten by the new one.
• A file in CSV format exported by CentreWare Internet Services (address book data) is not
designed to be edited or changed by editing software. The data may be damaged when it is
edited or changed. Due to the altered data, fax may be sent to undesired recipients.
Therefore, do not edit or change the file in CSV format (address book data) with software
such as Microsoft® Excel.
268
Sending Fax
1
2
Start up the computer, and a web browser.
Enter the machine's IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and
press the <Enter> key.
Note
• If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is
registered in the domain name server, you can access the machine using the URL with the
combination of the host name and the domain name. For example, if the host name is
"myhost", and the domain name is "example.com", then the URL is "myhost.example.com".
• Ask your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address.
• When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the address. The default
port number is "80".
• When using the Authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode into
the [User Name] and [Password] fields respectively. Ask your system administrator for the
user ID and passcode.
• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https"
instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.
Click the [Properties] tab, and
select [Services] > [E-mail] or
[Internet Fax] > [Public Address
Book] in the left frame on the
screen.
4
Click [Map Existing Address Book]
for [Export].
5
Specify the destination to save the
file in.
6
Enter the IP address or Internet
address of the machine
(DocuCentre-III C4100/C3100) into the browser address field, and press the <Enter>
key.
7
Click the [Properties] tab, and select [Services] > [E-mail] or [Internet Fax] > [Public
Address Book] in the left frame on the screen.
8
9
Click [Browse] in [Import Public Address Book] to specify the file saved in Step 5.
Computer Operations
3
10
Click [Import Now].
Important • Only fax destinations can be registered. Any addresses of Internet Fax and e-mail, or
destination servers for Scan to PC cannot be registered.
269
10 Computer Operations
Importing Scanned Data
There are four methods for importing documents from a machine's mailbox to your
computer.
Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application......................................................................270
Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3..........................................................................................272
Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services........................................................................274
Importing Using EasyOperator .................................................................................................275
Each procedure is as follows.
Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application
The following describes how to import documents from a machine's mailbox to
application software.
Network Scan Driver is used to import stored documents.
Network Scan Driver is software to allow a client-side application to import documents
(scan data) from a machine's mailbox via a network.
To use Network Scan Driver, your computer needs to have Network Scan Utility 3
installed.
Note
• Install Network Scan Utility 3 using the CD-ROM in the Driver CD Kit.
Computer Operations
To import documents stored in a mailbox, some items such as port status must be set in advance. For
more information, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" > "Configuration of Scan to Mailbox" in
the Administrator Guide. For information on the operation on the application, refer to the documentation
provided with the application.
For information on how to install Network Scan Driver, refer to the manual contained in the CD-ROM
in the Driver CD Kit.
To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to refer to the Network Scan Driver's
online help.
1
10
Launch application software to which documents are imported.
Important • The application must support TWAIN. TWAIN is a standard for scanners and other input
devices.
Note
270
• For information on supported applications, refer to the "Readme" contained in the CD-ROM
of the Driver CD Kit.
2
3
From the [File] menu, select the command for selecting the scanner (source).
4
From the [File] menu, select the
command for importing the image
from the scanner.
Select [FX Network Scanner 3
TWAIN], and click [Select].
Importing Scanned Data
5
From the displayed list, click the
scanner name of the machine, and
click [Next].
Note
• If no items are shown in the
list, click [Search Again]. The
application searches for
scanners.
• To display the scanner
names, use the dialog box
which can be displayed by
clicking [Search/Display
Settings]. For information on
how to change the displayed scanner names, refer to "Changing the display of scanner
names" (P.272).
• Only scanners on the network are automatically listed. To view a scanner on another
network, click [Search/Display Settings], and register the IP Address and scanner name. For
information on changing settings, refer to "Changing Network Scan Driver Settings" (P.272).
6
In the [Mailbox Number] field, enter
the mailbox number (001 - 200)
that contains the document to be
imported. In the [Passcode] field,
enter a password (up to 20 digits).
Note
Computer Operations
7
8
• From the next time you
perform this operation and
onward, you will be able to
select a mailbox number from
[Registered Mailboxes].
• Clicking [Select Scanner]
returns to step 5, where you can reselect a scanner.
Click [Confirm].
Select a document to import from
the list, and click [Import].
Note
• You can select one or more
documents.
10
• [Import], [Refresh], and
[Delete] are available from the
menu that appears when you
right-click on the list.
When the import starts, the scan
data is forwarded from the mailbox
to the client.
After the forwarding, the data is loaded onto the application software and is deleted
from the mailbox.
Note
• An icon is attached to a document that is scanned in pages and whose forwarding operation
has not been completed.
• For most applications except DocuWorks, Network Scan Driver expands the compressed
data and transfers the data to the applications in BMP format. For DocuWorks, on the other
hand, Network Scan Driver transfers the data without data expansion processing. For this
reason, it does not take much time for data transfer.
• The machine can be set not to delete the document from the mailbox after forwarding
operation. For details on how to set this, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" >
"Configuration of Scan to Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.
271
10 Computer Operations
Changing Network Scan Driver Settings
To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to refer to the Network Scan Driver's
online help.
„Changing the display of scanner names
You can change the display of
scanner names listed.
To change the display of scanner
names, click [Search/Display
Settings] in the scanner selection
dialog box.
Under [Scanner Name Display],
you can change the method in
which scanner names are displayed
in [Scanner for Searching].
Specify scanners to search for
under [Search Target Settings].
Note
• If you register a scanner by
clicking [Add], you can display
scanners from other networks.
„Import Method for Scanned Documents
Computer Operations
You can change the display and the
import settings for documents
scanned from a mailbox.
To change the import method, click
[Import Settings] from [File] menu in
the document selection dialog box,
and configure the settings in the
dialog box that appears.
Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3
10
The following describes how to use Mailbox Viewer 3 to import a document from a
machine's mailbox.
Mailbox Viewer 3 is software to import documents from a machine's mailbox without
using any client-side application.
To use Mailbox Viewer 3, your computer needs to have Network Scan Utility 3 installed.
Note
• Install Network Scan Utility 3 using the CD-ROM in the Driver CD Kit.
To import documents stored in a mailbox, some items such as port status must be set in advance. For
more information, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" > "Configuration of Scan to Mailbox" in
the Administrator Guide. For information on the operation on the application, refer to the documentation
provided with the application.
For instructions on installing Mailbox Viewer 3, refer to the manual contained in the CD-ROM of the
Driver CD Kit.
To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to see the Mailbox Viewer 3 online help.
1
Click [Start] and select [Programs] > [Fuji Xerox] > [Network Scanner Utility 3] >
[Mailbox Viewer 3].
Note
272
• If you used another directory for installation, specify the directory instead of above.
Importing Scanned Data
2
From the displayed list, click the
scanner name of the machine, and
click [Next].
Note
• If no items are shown in the
list, click [Search Again]. The
application searches for
scanners.
• To display the scanner
names, use the dialog box
which can be displayed by
clicking [Search/Display
Settings]. For information on
how to change the displayed scanner names, refer to "Changing the display of scanner
names" (P.274).
• Only when the machine is connected to the network, the scanner name is automatically
shown in the list. To view the machine connected to other networks, click on [Search/Display
Settings] and register an IP address and scanner name. For information on how to change
the settings, refer to "Changing the display of scanner names" (P.274).
3
In the [Mailbox Number] field, enter
the number of the mailbox (001 200) that contains the document to
be imported. In the [Passcode]
field, enter a password (up to 20
digits).
Note
• Clicking [Select Scanner] returns to step 2, where you can reselect a scanner.
Click [Confirm].
Select a document from the list,
and click [Import].
Note
6
Computer Operations
4
5
• From the next time you
perform this operation and
onward, you will be able to
select a mailbox number from
[Registered Mailboxes].
• One or more documents can
be selected.
10
• When [Always display
destination to save] is set for
[File Saving Options] under
the import settings, a dialog
box for specifying a save
destination is displayed. When
the dialog box appears,
specify a save destination,
and select [OK].
For information on Mailbox Viewer 3 settings, refer to "Import settings for scanned
documents" (P.274).
The document is imported to the specified directory.
Note
• When [Save in fixed destination] is set for [File Saving Options] under the import settings, a
document is saved in the specified directory.
For information on importing documents, refer to "Import settings for scanned documents"
(P.274)
Changing Mailbox Viewer 3 Settings
To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to see the Mailbox Viewer 3 online help.
273
10 Computer Operations
„Changing the display of scanner names
You can change the display of
scanner names listed.
To change the display of scanner
names, click [Search/Display
Settings] in the scanner selection
dialog box.
Under [Scanner Name Display],
you can change the method in
which scanner names are displayed
in [Scanner for Searching].
Specify scanners to search for
under [Search Target Settings].
Note
• If you register a scanner by
clicking [Add], you can display
scanners from other networks.
„Import settings for scanned documents
You can change the display and the
import settings for documents
scanned from a mailbox.
Computer Operations
To change the import method, click
[Details] from [File] menu in the
document selection dialog box, and
configure the settings in the dialog
box that appears.
10
Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services
This section describes how to import documents stored in a machine's mailbox using
CentreWare Internet Services.
CentreWare Internet Services allows you to import documents from a machine's
mailbox to a computer through no application software.
For overview of CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.277).
1
2
274
Start up the computer, and a web browser.
Enter the machine's IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and
press the <Enter> key.
Importing Scanned Data
Note
• If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is
registered in the domain name server, you can access the machine using the Internet
address with the combination of the host name and the domain name. For example, if the
host name is "myhost", and the domain name is "example.com", then the Internet address is
"myhost.example.com".
• Ask your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address.
• When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the Internet address.
• If using the authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode into the
[User Name] and [Password] fields. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and
passcode.
• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https"
instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.
3
Select [Mailbox] from the [Scan]
tab.
4
Click [Document List] of the
mailbox that contains the
documents to be imported.
Note
• If a passcode is set, enter the
passcode in the [Passcode]
field (up to 20 digits).
Place a check next to each
document to be imported, and click
[Retrieve].
6
Click [Save this link].
Computer Operations
5
10
For details on this operation, click [Help]
in the bottom frame to see the online help.
Importing Using EasyOperator
When you use Fuji Xerox applications supporting the webDAV protocol, such as
EasyOperator, you can import documents stored in a machine’s mailbox to your
computer without using a network scan driver.
The documents in a mailbox can also be listed/displayed with thumbnails.
To import documents stored in a mailbox, some items such as port status need must be set in advance.
For more information, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" > "Configuration of Scan to Mailbox"
in the Administrator Guide. For information on the operation on the application, refer to the
documentation provided with the application.
The following describes how to import documents stored in a machine’s mailbox by
using EasyOperator as an example.
275
10 Computer Operations
1
Click the [Start] menu, and select [Programs] > [Fuji Xerox] > [CentreWare
EasyOperator] > [EasyOperator].
Note
2
• If you have changed the directory when installing the application, specify the new directory.
In the left frame of the window displayed, add a machine’s mailbox to [Mailbox].
Add the mailbox in which documents to be imported are stored.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Computer Operations
10
276
For details on how to add a mailbox, refer to the EasyOperator’s online help.
Select [Refresh] on the [Display] menu.
Click [+] on the left-hand side of [Mailbox] to display the added mailbox.
When you select the added mailbox, the document will be displayed in the right frame.
Select [Thumbnails] in the [Display] menu to display the document with thumbnail.
Check the thumbnails of the document to be retrieved, and select the document.
Select [Retrieve] from the [Tools] menu.
Select a save destination in the [Browse For Folder] dialog box, and click [OK].
CentreWare Internet Services
CentreWare Internet Services
CentreWare Internet Services requires a TCP/IP environment, and enables you to view
the status of the machine and its jobs, as well as change settings via a web browser.
You can also import documents saved in a mailbox.
For information on importing documents, refer to "Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services"
(P.274).
For CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "6 CentreWare Internet Services Settings" in the
Administrator Guide.
CentreWare Internet Services Screen
The [CentreWare Internet Services] screen consists of five frames (divided windows).
The information displayed in each frame depends on the feature: [Status], [Jobs],
[Print], [Scan], [Properties], or [Support].
Note
• Clicking [Help] in the top frame displays the online help for CentreWare Internet Services.
Top
frame
Upper left
frame
Right
frame
Lower left
frame
„Top Frame
Displayed at the top of the window. This frame includes the logo, the machine model
name, a link to the online help, user information, and tabs (links) leading to each
feature.
For details on each feature provided by CentreWare Internet Services, click [Help] in this frame to see
the help.
„Right Frame / Upper Left Frame
Information appearing in the right and upper left frames changes depending on the
feature. Selecting a feature displays its available features and information in these
frames.
„Left Center Frame
Displays the machine information and status, and the [Refresh Status] button. Clicking
[Refresh Status] updates the information. This frame does not appear on the [Status]
or [Properties] screen.
„Lower Left Frame
Displays a link to the Fuji Xerox home page.
277
Computer Operations
Left center
frame
10
10 Computer Operations
Main features of CentreWare Internet Services are listed below.
Tab Name
Status
Main Features
z
z
Displaying the machine status
Displaying the status of the paper trays, output trays and consumables
such as toner cartridges.
Linking to the copyright screen.
Jobs
z
Deleting lists of jobs and jobs, and displaying job history and error
history.
Print
z
Job Submission
Allows you to specify and print a file stored on your computer.
Scan
z
Mailbox
Allows you to register and set mailboxes.
Job flow sheets
Allows you to create, edit, and delete job flow sheets.
z
Properties
z
Displaying and setting the items such as Machine configuration,
Interface, and Emulation settings.
Support
z
Displaying support information
Note
• Some field settings take effect after a reboot (after power-cycling the machine or after
changing a system setting from the control panel).
Computer Operations
• If a setting is changed by CentreWare Internet Services during operation on the control
panel, the updated information does not appear on the control panel. Power-cycle the
machine in that case.
• To change the settings of items set by the system administrator, you will need to enter the
user ID and passcode. Contact the system administrator for the user ID and passcode.
Browser
CentreWare Internet Services supports the following browsers:
„For Windows OS
10
z
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack 1 or later
z
Netscape Navigator 7.1 or later
„For Mac OS X 10.3.9
z
Netscape Navigator 7.1 or later
„For Mac OS X 10.4
z
Safari 1.3 or later
Browser Settings
Before using this service, ensure the following settings on your browser.
The following is the setting procedure for Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1.
278
1
2
3
Select [Internet Options] from the [Tools] menu.
4
Click [OK].
In the [General] tab, click [Settings] for [Temporary Internet Files].
In the [Settings] dialog box, select [Every visit to the page] or [Every time you start
Internet Explorer] for [Check for newer versions of stored pages:].
CentreWare Internet Services
Proxy Server and Port Number
The following describes proxy server settings and a port number required for this
service.
„Proxy Server
We recommend that you access this service directly, not through a proxy server.
Note
• If using a proxy server, specifying the machine's IP address in the browser results in slower
responses, and could prevent some screens from appearing. In this case, it is necessary to
set the machine's IP address on the browser not to go through a proxy server. Refer to your
browser's documentation for the setting instructions.
„Port Number
The default port number of this service is "80". The port number can be changed in
[Properties] > [Protocol Settings] > [HTTP]. Usable ports are "1" to "65535".
If you set the port to a number other than 80, you must add ":" and the port number after
the IP address or the Internet address when entering the address into your browser.
For example, if the port number is 8080, the URL is:
http://[the machine's IP address]:8080/
or
http://[the machine's Internet address]:8080/
You can check the port number in [Configuration Report]. For information on [Configuration Report],
refer to "4 Machine Status" > "Machine Information" > "Print Reports" in the Administrator Guide.
• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https"
instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.
Starting CentreWare Internet Services
To use this service, perform the following procedure on your computer.
1
2
Start up the computer, and a web browser.
Enter the machine's IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and
press the <Enter> key.
Note
• If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is
registered in the domain name server, you can access the machine using the Internet
address with the combination of the host name and the domain name. For example, if the
host name is "myhost", and the domain name is "example.com", then the Internet address is
"myhost.example.com".
• Ask your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address.
• When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the Internet address.
• If using the authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode into the
[User Name] and [Password] fields. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and
passcode.
• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https"
instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.
• If authentication of the system administrator fails, the following message is displayed in the
right frame of web browser.
"Authentication failed"
• If the number of times that authentication fails exceeds the set number, the following
message is displayed in the right frame of web browser.
"Switch the machine Off and then On for System Administrator login."
279
Computer Operations
Note
10
11 Appendix
This chapter contains a list of terms used in this guide.
z
Glossary....................................................................................................282
11 Appendix
Glossary
Term
Appendix
A3
420 × 297 mm paper
A4
297 × 210 mm paper
A5
210 × 148 mm paper
Alias
An alternative name of the machine's e-mail address.
For example, when the e-mail address for the machine is
ifax@mb1.abc.fujixerox.com, you can use ifax@fuji-xerox.com
(alias) to reach the same location.
Auto Center
A feature that automatically moves an image to the center of
paper when copying.
Auto Clear
A feature that automatically returns the touch screen to its
default display when the machine is inactive for a certain
period of time.
Auto Paper Select
Based on the document loaded and the magnification
selected, the machine automatically selects an appropriate
paper size.
Auto Tray Switching
When paper runs out during copying, another tray of identical
paper size and orientation automatically begins supplying
paper.
B4
364 × 257 mm paper
B5
257 × 182 mm paper
Binding Shift
When creating a booklet, this feature adds margins to the
center binding area of documents.
Book Scanning
A feature that copies the left and right pages of an unfolded
document onto two separate sheets of paper.
Border Limit
(Page split threshold value)
One more sheet is used when the length of the transmitted
document exceeds the length of paper installed on the
receiving terminal. A margin at the bottom of a received
document can be eliminated so that the data can be printed on
one page.
The amount of space that can be removed from the bottom of
a document is the border limit. When the border limit value is
small, the data is printed on the next page. But when it is large,
a larger space can be cut so that data can be printed on one
page.
Calibration
This refers to smoothness of colors. Calibration levels are
shown in gradation steps. The greater the step, the smoother
the color will be.
CMS
Color Management System. It corrects device-dependent
color differences to match the colors printed on your output
with the colors displayed on your screen.
Collate
A feature where each copy set is delivered in the same order
the documents were copied.
Communication(s)
A communications network that can offer voice data
(telephone), image data (fax), video data (videotext) and PC
data (PC communication service) over the same channel.
In this guide, it is mostly referred to as transmitting/receiving
images as well as speaking with a remote user.
11
282
Description
Glossary
Term
Description
Standard paper sizes, such as A4 and B5.
Default Screen
A screen displayed on the touch screen immediately after
switching the power on, or pressing the <Clear All> button.
The screen is also displayed when the Auto Clear feature is
used.
Default Value
A factory default value, or a value set in the System
Administration mode.
Dial
In this guide, it refers to entering a recipient's fax number.
The method of dialing provided by the machine include:
manual dialing using the numeric keypad, speed dialing, one
touch dialing, and using the address book, etc.
Dial Tone
A tone generated from the telephone line. It indicates that you
are connected to the line.
Dial Type
The dial type of connected line. The machine offers two dial
types: Tone (push circuit) and 10PPS (dial circuit / 10PPS).
Document Image
An image of a document scanned by the machine.
DPI
Dots per inch. A unit used to describe printing resolution in
terms of the number of dots printed in one inch. Used as a unit
to describe resolution.
ECM
Error Correction Mode.
A type of G3 transmission. ECM transmission sends the
document image data in segments and retransmits segments
that the remote machine receives incorrectly.
"ECM" described on the [Activity Report] shows that the
communication was processed using ECM.
Edge Erase
A feature that erases the top/bottom, left/right or center edge
of a document image when copying.
Emulation
This refers to operating the printer to achieve the same print
results as when printing with other manufacturers' printers.
This mode is called the Emulation Mode.
Energy Saver Feature
A feature that switches the machine status to standby after a
period of inactivity.
The following energy saver features can be set for the
machine.
Low Power Mode: The power to the fuser unit and motor is
lowered when the machine is left unused
for a fixed amount of time. The touch
screen goes out, and the <Energy Saver>
button lights.
Sleep Mode:
Most of the units in the machine are in
standby status. The machine consumes
the least power.
Error Code
A code is displayed on the control panel or a report when a
problem occurs.
283
Appendix
Cut Paper
11
11 Appendix
Term
Appendix
11
284
Description
F Code
A transmission method defined by Communications and
Information Network Association of Japan (CIAJ) for use of
T.30∗ sub-addresses standardized by ITU-T. Between the
machines with the F code feature, including those
manufactured by other companies, various features making
use of F Code can be used. (∗: Communication standard)
With the Internet Fax feature of the machine, you can use F
Code to forward fax documents received in mailboxes by email.
Fax Gateway
Connects the Internet network to regular telephone lines,
enabling e-mail documents to be sent as fax documents to
regular fax machines.
Fax Server
A feature that transfers image data received by the machine to
a Server Fax server and transfers image data received by a
Server Fax server to the machine via a network based on the
settings you made.
Using this feature enables you to manage multiple machines.
Forced 4800 bps
This refers to communicating with a remote terminal outside
the country.
It is also one of the Transmission Mode selections that
reduces transmission speed to enable reliable
communications even under poor line conditions.
G3
A facsimile communication system standardized by the
advisory committee for International Telecommunications
(CCITT, now the ITU-T).
Header
A record of the sender. It is printed on the top edge of a
received document.
ICM
Image Color Matching. A color management software used
with Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
It corrects device-dependent color differences to match the
colors printed on your output with the colors displayed on your
screen.
Image Enhancement
A feature which makes the border between black and white
smooth, with rough edges reduced, giving the appearance of a
higher resolution.
Image Rotation
This feature rotates a document image by 90 degrees when
the document orientation is not the same as the paper supply
orientation.
Independent X-Y%
A feature that transforms a document image horizontally or
vertically.
Internet
A worldwide communications network that combine
miscellaneous networks.
Internet Fax
Unlike a regular fax machine, Internet Fax uses corporate
networks or the Internet to send or receive e-mail (TIFF
attachments).
Job Offset
This feature outputs sheets in alternating offsets to make each
set easier to recognize.
Line Monitor
Allows you to audibly monitor a transmission through the
speaker after dialing and until you are connected.
Glossary
Term
Description
This term refers to this machine. This is a general term for
terminals such as telephones, facsimile machines, personal
and computers.
Low Toner Alert Tone
A tone the device sounds when the drum/toner cartridge
needs to be replaced.
Machine Ready Tone
A tone produced when the status of the machine changes from
standby to ready, such as when the power is switched on.
MIME Type
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension.
A method for determining what kind of data was received by email. A MIME type refers to the type of data.
Multiple-Up
A feature that copies two or four documents onto one sheet of
paper.
NV Memory
A non-volatile memory, which stores the settings information
of the printer even when the printer is switched off.
Off-hook Dialing
Dialing with the handset off the hook.
On-hook Dialing
Dialing with the handset on the cradle.
Optional accessory
This refers to a product that is sold separately. In addition to
the machine's basic configuration, various optional features
are available as separately-sold optional accessories. (For
more information on optional accessories, contact our
Customer Support Center.)
PJL
Printer Job Language.
A command language for controlling printers developed by
Hewlett Packard.
Polling
A feature that allows you to retrieve a document from a remote
machine.
POP3
Post Office Protocol Version 3.
One of the commonly used communications protocols used for
receiving e-mail.
It sets up a private mailbox on a provider's e-mail server, and
receives messages when a communication is made. POP3 is
for receiving only. SMTP is used for sending e-mail.
Print Page Buffer
A location where print data is rendered.
Printable Area
The actual area on paper which can be printed.
Profile
A protocol controlling image resolution, paper size, and other
attributes when sending or receiving faxes using Internet Fax.
The profiles that can be used vary with the Internet Fax of the
remote terminal. When specifying a profile, check that it can
be handled by the other party's Internet Fax-compatible
machine.
RAM
Random Access Memory. It is a storage device (memory)
where information can be retrieved as well as stored.
Receive Buffer
A space used to temporarily store data sent from a client
computer.
Receiving Paper Size
A feature that specifies the output paper size for received fax
documents. The specified paper size will be declared to
recipients from the sender.
285
Appendix
Local Device
11
11 Appendix
Term
Appendix
11
286
Description
Recipient
The person or terminal you send a document to. "Dialing"
indicates the operation of entering a recipient's telephone
number.
For Internet Fax, this refers to the recipient's e-mail address.
Remote Terminal
A terminal with which you want to communicate. This is a
general term for terminals such as telephones, facsimile
machines and personal computers.
Resolution
Represents a fineness of detail that can be distinguished on
an image. It is usually described in terms of the number of dots
per square inch (dpi), and a higher value indicates a higher
resolution (finely represented).
ROM
Read Only Memory. It is a storage device (memory) specific
for the retrieval of information.
ROS
Raster Output Scanner. It is a device for writing image signals
to a drum (light sensitive). A ROS is often referred to as a laser
beam scanner.
Scan
Sensing or reading a paper document and converting the
optical image of the document to an electronic image.
The machine offers two scanning devices: document glass
and document feeder.
Screen
The screen that is displayed on the touch screen. It displays
messages and feature buttons.
Select
In this document, "Select" refers to highlighting a feature
selection by touching the feature button on the touch screen
with your finger.
Send Password
This feature requires to enter an "S" and the ID of a remote
terminal after entering its fax number. This prevents
transmission errors.
Sender
Originator of a communication. It is used as opposed to
"recipient".
Separator
A blank, colored, or copied paper inserted between two copy
sets.
Side Tray
A feature that outputs copies to the Side Tray with the copied
face up.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
A communications protocol (an agreement governing the way
data is transmitted) commonly used for sending and receiving
e-mail.
Start Reservation
In this guide, this refers to loading a document, selecting
features, and pressing the <Start> button immediately after
switching the power on. Once the machine is warmed up and
ready, it will automatically start copying.
Status Display Code
A code that indicates the machine status. When an error
occurs on the machine, a status display code appears on the
touch screen.
Store
In this guide, it is referred to as scanning an image of a
document and saving the image on the machine.
Stored Programming
By registering a series of operations, the machine executes
the operations with just one press of [Stored Programming] on
the touch screen.
Glossary
Term
Description
Super G3 (SG3)
A G3 communication system conforming to ITU V.34.
This system offers higher transmission speed (33.6 kbps) than
the normal G3 mode.
Transmission Interval
The period between transmissions.
Transparency Copy
A feature that copies on transparency films or inserts a sheet
of blank or copied paper between transparency films.
UNC
UNC (Universal Naming Convention) is a way to specify a path
describing the location of a network resource, such as shared
folders, or shared printers, on a network, Microsoft Networks
(SMB).
The UNC syntax uses "\\" before the hostname, hostname and
resource name are delimited by "\".
If the hostname is "myhost", and if its host shared folder name
is "sharefolder", the UNC syntax is described as follows:
\\myhost\sharefolder
Appendix
11
287
Index
Index
Numerics
Booklet ................................................................. 84
Booklet Creation .......................................... 84, 263
10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX connector .................. 38
booklet staple cartridge ....................................... 35
2 Sided Book Copy ............................................. 74
booklet unit .......................................................... 35
2 sided copies of facing pages ............................ 74
booklet unit side cover ......................................... 35
2 Sided Printing ................................................. 263
breaker ................................................................ 41
2 Sided Scanning ...................................... 135, 193
Broadcast .......................................................... 158
Broadcast Send ......................................... 116, 162
A
Browse ............................................................... 190
Build Job ............................................................ 100
Add .................................................................... 125
adding a comment/a date/page numbers to
C
copies .................................................................. 91
<C (Clear)> button ............................................... 45
adding originals ................................................. 103
Calculator % ........................................................ 60
adding sender name and phone number to
calling a stored program .................................... 243
faxes ................................................................. 143
center output tray ................................................. 34
Address Book .................................... 126, 180, 189
center tray ...................................................... 36, 37
adjusting color balance ....................................... 70
center tray front transport cover .......................... 36
adjusting copy density/sharpness/saturation of
CentreWare Internet Services ................... 274, 277
images ................................................................ 68
changing the orientation of images ...................... 80
adjusting fax density ......................................... 132
Chapter Start/Separators ................................... 102
adjusting scan density and image sharpness ... 202
Charge Print ...................................................... 264
adjusting the color tone ....................................... 71
checking completed jobs ................................... 248
adjusting the copy density ................................... 66
checking the finished output of the copy ........... 102
adjusting the image position ............................... 78
<Clear All> button ................................................ 45
Advanced Settings ............................................ 202
Color .................................................................... 65
<All Services> button .......................................... 45
Color Balance ...................................................... 70
allowing remote machines to retrieve
Color Effects ........................................................ 69
documents from your machine .......................... 155
color mode ......................................................... 192
Annotations ......................................................... 91
Color Scanning .................................................. 192
attaching covers to copies .................................. 87
Color Shift ............................................................ 71
Auto duplex module ............................................ 34
Color Space ....................................................... 204
Auto Receive ..................................................... 167
Combine Original Sets ....................................... 103
Auto Size Detect ....................................... 135, 207
combining multiple pages into one sheet .......... 147
communication mode ........................................ 140
B
Compression Method ........................................ 196
confirming remote machine response prior to
Background Suppression .................................. 203
transmission ...................................................... 157
Batch Print ........................................................ 222
confirming the fax job in Job Status ................... 113
Book Copying ...................................................... 73
Contrast ............................................................. 203
Book Faxing ...................................................... 137
contrast dial ......................................................... 44
Book Scanning .................................................. 206
control panel ........................................................ 34
289
Index
adding a stamp when scanning a document ..... 138
Copies ..................................................................73
enlarged copies spread over multiple
<Copy> button .....................................................45
sheets .................................................................. 90
Copy Output .........................................................82
enlarged/reduced copies ..................................... 58
Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets .....73
Enter Output Size .............................................. 210
copying multiple pages onto one sheet ...............89
entering specific symbols .................................. 130
Cover Note .........................................................143
entering text ......................................................... 47
Covers .................................................................87
entering/changing a stored program name ....... 241
creaser unit ..........................................................35
erasing edges and margin shadows in
<Custom 2> button ..............................................45
the document ..................................................... 208
<Custom 3> button ..............................................45
erasing edges and margin shadows of
the document ....................................................... 77
D
erasing the background color of
documents ........................................................... 69
Delay Start .........................................................141
erasing the background color of
Delayed Print .....................................................263
documents/adjusting contrast ............................ 203
Delete Outside/Delete Inside .............................104
Exit 2 tray ............................................................ 34
deleting charge print documents ........................254
deleting outside or inside of the selected
F
area ....................................................................104
Index
deleting private print documents ........................255
F Code ............................................................... 149
deleting secure print documents ........................250
Facsimile Information Services ......... 154, 157, 169
deleting stored documents .................................249
Fax .................................................................... 125
deleting stored programs ...................................241
Fax/Internet Fax ................................................ 125
density levels .....................................................203
File Format ........................................................ 194
Destination ................................................. 111, 190
file format for output data .................................. 194
<Dial Pause> button ............................................45
File Name .......................................................... 213
Digital Signature ................................................152
File Name Conflict ............................................. 214
Direct Fax ..........................................................268
finisher top cover ................................................. 37
document feeder ..................................50, 108, 172
finisher tray .......................................................... 35
document glass ..............................34, 51, 109, 173
Finisher-A1 .......................................................... 37
Document Name ................................................214
Finisher-B1 .......................................................... 35
document type .....................................67, 133, 194
finishing options ................................................... 82
DocuWorks ........................................................195
Folding ................................................................. 98
Duplex automatic document feeder .....................34
Forced 4800 bps ............................................... 141
From .................................................................. 185
E
front cover ............................................... 34, 35, 37
front transport cover ............................................ 35
Edge Erase ..................................................77, 208
E-mail .................................................................180
G
E-mail Printing ...........................................264, 266
Enable Broadcast ..............................................125
G3 ...................................................................... 141
Encryption ..........................................................152
General Settings ........................................ 132, 192
<Energy Saver> button ........................................44
Energy Saver mode .............................................42
H
enlarged copies ...................................................58
handling error terminations ................................ 260
290
Index
HCF B1 ............................................................... 34
LINE 4 .................................................................. 38
high capacity feeder ............................................ 34
loading documents ............................................ 172
hole punching ...................................................... 84
local terminal information ................................... 128
hole-punch unit 2 and 3 holes ............................. 36
<Log In/Out> button ............................................. 44
hole-punch unit 2 and 4 holes ............................. 36
Login Name ....................................................... 215
hole-punch waste container ................................ 35
Low Power mode ................................................. 42
I
M
ID Card Copying ................................................. 99
machine components .......................................... 34
image compression ratio scanning ....................211
<Machine Status> button ..................................... 44
Image Enhancement ................................... 69, 203
Mailbox .............................................................. 218
Image Options ................................................... 202
Mailbox Receive ................................................ 168
image quality ................................................. 67, 69
Mailbox Viewer 3 ............................................... 177
Image Rotation .................................................... 80
Manual Receive ................................................. 167
Image Shift .......................................................... 78
Manual Send ..................................................... 157
Independent X-Y% .............................................. 60
Message ............................................................ 186
inserting blank sheets between transparencies .. 88
Meta Data .......................................................... 215
Internet Fax encrypted by S/MIME ................... 152
Mirror Image/Negative Image .............................. 81
Internet Fax Profile ............................................ 151
Mixed Sized Originals .......................... 77, 136, 207
Internet Fax Subject .......................................... 145
More... ............................................................... 195
Internet Fax transmission ...................................118
multiple copies on a single sheet ......................... 98
Internet Fax with a digital signature by
multiple copies on one sheet ............................... 91
S/MIME ............................................................. 152
Multiple-Up .......................................... 89, 147, 263
Internet Fax/Fax ................................................ 125
<Interrupt> button ............................................... 45
N
Interrupt indicator ................................................ 45
name for the file to be saved ............................. 214
J
Name for the File to be sent .............................. 213
Job Assembly .................................................... 100
Network Scanning ............................................. 188
Job Flow Sheets ............................................... 232
New Recipient ................................................... 183
<Job in Memory> indicator .................................. 44
non-standard size document ............................... 75
Job Status ......................................................... 246
Non-target Area Color ......................................... 65
<Job Status> button ............................................ 44
numeric keypad ................................................... 45
JPEG ................................................................. 195
O
L
one touch button panels ...................................... 45
Layout Adjustment .............................. 72, 135, 205
One touch buttons ............................................. 128
Left Page then Right ......................................... 206
one touch buttons ................................................ 45
License ................................................................ 26
On-hook ............................................................. 157
license ................................................................. 26
<Online> indicator ............................................... 44
Lighten/Darken .............................................. 66, 68
orientation of the loaded documents ................... 81
LINE 1 ................................................................. 38
Original Orientation .................................... 193, 209
LINE 2 ................................................................. 38
Original Size ........................................ 75, 135, 207
291
Index
Network Scan Driver .......................................... 272
Original Type .......................................67, 133, 194
receiver .............................................................. 157
Originals ...............................................................73
Recipient Print Sets ........................................... 146
Originals Orientation ............................................81
Recipient(s) ....................................................... 184
Output Color ........................................................63
Reduce/Enlarge ......................................... 137, 209
output color ..........................................................63
reduced copies .................................................... 58
Output Format ......................................................82
registering stored programs .............................. 240
Remote Mailbox ................................................ 147
P
Removing/Confirming a Recipient ..................... 130
Repeat Image ...................................................... 91
paper for copying .................................................61
reply address ..................................................... 213
Paper Supply .......................................................61
Reply To ............................................................ 213
paper supply (selecting the paper for copying) ....61
<RESET> button ................................................. 38
Password ...................................................191, 215
Resolution ................................................. 134, 205
PDF ............................................................194, 195
retrieving documents from remote machines .... 154
Photo .................................................................194
reversed copies of images .................................. 81
Photo & Text ......................................................194
<Review> button ................................................. 44
Photographs ......................................................202
Right Page then Left .......................................... 206
polling ................................................................154
RSA BSAFE ........................................................ 26
Poster ..........................................................90, 263
power switch ........................................................34
S
preferentially printing pending jobs ....................259
Index
Preset Repeat Image ...........................................98
Sample Job ....................................................... 102
Primary Relay Station ID ...................................165
Sample Set ........................................................ 263
Print ...................................................................265
Saturation ............................................................ 68
print driver ..........................................................264
saving the scanned data ................................... 177
Print from Mailbox ..............................................264
Scan .................................................................. 270
printing control numbers on the background of
scan density ...................................................... 202
copies ..................................................................96
scan ratio ........................................................... 137
printing delayed print documents .......................253
scan size ........................................................... 207
printing multiple sets at the destination
scan size for the document ................................. 75
machine .............................................................146
scan size for the original .................................... 135
printing sample set documents ..........................252
Scan to Mailbox ................................................. 187
printing stored documents .................................249
Scan to PC ........................................................ 189
Priority Send ......................................................141
scanning a color photograph ............................. 202
Private Charge Print ..................................255, 264
scanning both sides of a document ................... 193
processing documents scanned with different
scanning different size documents
settings as one job .............................................100
simultaneously ..................................... 76, 136, 207
Promote Job ......................................................247
scanning facing pages on separate
Proportional .......................................................209
sheets ........................................................ 136, 206
Proportional % .....................................................59
scanning ratio .................................................... 209
Public Mailbox ............................................155, 256
scanning resolution ................................... 134, 205
Punching ..............................................................83
Searchable Text ................................................ 196
Secondary Relay Station ID .............................. 165
R
Secure Print ....................................................... 263
Send from Mailbox ............................................ 218
Read Receipts ...................................................212
292
Send Header ..................................................... 143
Index
Send Options .................................................... 139
touch screen ........................................................ 44
Send Priority ..................................................... 141
Transfer Protocol ............................................... 189
Send Time ......................................................... 141
transmitting 2-sided originals ............................. 132
Sending Faxes to Multiple Recipients ............... 125
Transmitting Documents With a Cover Page .... 143
sending in sections ........................................... 212
Transparency Options ......................................... 88
Server ............................................................... 191
Transparency Separators .................................. 263
Server Fax ........................................................ 123
Tray 1 .................................................................. 34
Shadow Suppression ........................................ 203
Tray 2 .................................................................. 34
Shared Name .................................................... 191
Tray 3 .................................................................. 34
Sharpness ........................................................... 68
Tray 5 (bypass) .................................................... 34
sharpness ......................................................... 203
Tray 6 .................................................................. 34
side output tray ................................................... 34
tray attachment .................................................... 35
Sideways Images .............................................. 194
Sleep Mode ......................................................... 42
U
Source Color ....................................................... 64
specifying a destination using a one touch
Undelivered Faxes ............................................. 257
button ................................................................ 128
Upright Images .................................................. 194
specifying a destination using an address
USB 2.0 interface connector ................................ 38
number .............................................................. 127
User Name ........................................................ 191
specifying a destination using the address
using F Code transmission ................................ 149
book .................................................................. 126
using remote mailbox ........................................ 147
specifying destination using the keyboard
screen ............................................................... 128
V
<Speed Dial> button ........................................... 45
Speed Dialing .................................................... 127
variable size ....................................................... 207
Split Send .......................................................... 212
Stamp ................................................................ 138
W
Standard Size ........................................... 136, 207
Watermark ................................................... 96, 263
Stapling ............................................................... 83
WebDAV ............................................................ 177
<Start> button ..................................................... 45
<Stop> button ..................................................... 45
X
stopping the fax job ............................................114
Subject .............................................................. 185
XPS ................................................................... 195
suppressing the document background ............ 203
T
Target Area Color ............................................... 65
TEL ..................................................................... 38
Text ................................................................... 194
TIFF-F ............................................................... 152
TIFF-J ............................................................... 152
TIFF-S ............................................................... 152
top cover ............................................................. 35
Top Page then Bottom ...................................... 206
293
Index
staple cartridge ............................................. 35, 37
DocuCentre-III C4100/C3100
User Guide
ME4263E2-1 (Edition 1)
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
July 2008
Copyright © 2008 by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.